]> gcc.gnu.org Git - gcc.git/blob - gcc/cse.c
*** empty log message ***
[gcc.git] / gcc / cse.c
1 /* Common subexpression elimination for GNU compiler.
2 Copyright (C) 1987, 1988, 1989, 1992 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3
4 This file is part of GNU CC.
5
6 GNU CC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
7 it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
8 the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
9 any later version.
10
11 GNU CC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
12 but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
13 MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
14 GNU General Public License for more details.
15
16 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
17 along with GNU CC; see the file COPYING. If not, write to
18 the Free Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. */
19
20
21 #include "config.h"
22 #include "rtl.h"
23 #include "regs.h"
24 #include "hard-reg-set.h"
25 #include "flags.h"
26 #include "real.h"
27 #include "insn-config.h"
28 #include "recog.h"
29
30 #include <stdio.h>
31 #include <setjmp.h>
32
33 /* The basic idea of common subexpression elimination is to go
34 through the code, keeping a record of expressions that would
35 have the same value at the current scan point, and replacing
36 expressions encountered with the cheapest equivalent expression.
37
38 It is too complicated to keep track of the different possibilities
39 when control paths merge; so, at each label, we forget all that is
40 known and start fresh. This can be described as processing each
41 basic block separately. Note, however, that these are not quite
42 the same as the basic blocks found by a later pass and used for
43 data flow analysis and register packing. We do not need to start fresh
44 after a conditional jump instruction if there is no label there.
45
46 We use two data structures to record the equivalent expressions:
47 a hash table for most expressions, and several vectors together
48 with "quantity numbers" to record equivalent (pseudo) registers.
49
50 The use of the special data structure for registers is desirable
51 because it is faster. It is possible because registers references
52 contain a fairly small number, the register number, taken from
53 a contiguously allocated series, and two register references are
54 identical if they have the same number. General expressions
55 do not have any such thing, so the only way to retrieve the
56 information recorded on an expression other than a register
57 is to keep it in a hash table.
58
59 Registers and "quantity numbers":
60
61 At the start of each basic block, all of the (hardware and pseudo)
62 registers used in the function are given distinct quantity
63 numbers to indicate their contents. During scan, when the code
64 copies one register into another, we copy the quantity number.
65 When a register is loaded in any other way, we allocate a new
66 quantity number to describe the value generated by this operation.
67 `reg_qty' records what quantity a register is currently thought
68 of as containing.
69
70 All real quantity numbers are greater than or equal to `max_reg'.
71 If register N has not been assigned a quantity, reg_qty[N] will equal N.
72
73 Quantity numbers below `max_reg' do not exist and none of the `qty_...'
74 variables should be referenced with an index below `max_reg'.
75
76 We also maintain a bidirectional chain of registers for each
77 quantity number. `qty_first_reg', `qty_last_reg',
78 `reg_next_eqv' and `reg_prev_eqv' hold these chains.
79
80 The first register in a chain is the one whose lifespan is least local.
81 Among equals, it is the one that was seen first.
82 We replace any equivalent register with that one.
83
84 If two registers have the same quantity number, it must be true that
85 REG expressions with `qty_mode' must be in the hash table for both
86 registers and must be in the same class.
87
88 The converse is not true. Since hard registers may be referenced in
89 any mode, two REG expressions might be equivalent in the hash table
90 but not have the same quantity number if the quantity number of one
91 of the registers is not the same mode as those expressions.
92
93 Constants and quantity numbers
94
95 When a quantity has a known constant value, that value is stored
96 in the appropriate element of qty_const. This is in addition to
97 putting the constant in the hash table as is usual for non-regs.
98
99 Whether a reg or a constant is preferred is determined by the configuration
100 macro CONST_COSTS and will often depend on the constant value. In any
101 event, expressions containing constants can be simplified, by fold_rtx.
102
103 When a quantity has a known nearly constant value (such as an address
104 of a stack slot), that value is stored in the appropriate element
105 of qty_const.
106
107 Integer constants don't have a machine mode. However, cse
108 determines the intended machine mode from the destination
109 of the instruction that moves the constant. The machine mode
110 is recorded in the hash table along with the actual RTL
111 constant expression so that different modes are kept separate.
112
113 Other expressions:
114
115 To record known equivalences among expressions in general
116 we use a hash table called `table'. It has a fixed number of buckets
117 that contain chains of `struct table_elt' elements for expressions.
118 These chains connect the elements whose expressions have the same
119 hash codes.
120
121 Other chains through the same elements connect the elements which
122 currently have equivalent values.
123
124 Register references in an expression are canonicalized before hashing
125 the expression. This is done using `reg_qty' and `qty_first_reg'.
126 The hash code of a register reference is computed using the quantity
127 number, not the register number.
128
129 When the value of an expression changes, it is necessary to remove from the
130 hash table not just that expression but all expressions whose values
131 could be different as a result.
132
133 1. If the value changing is in memory, except in special cases
134 ANYTHING referring to memory could be changed. That is because
135 nobody knows where a pointer does not point.
136 The function `invalidate_memory' removes what is necessary.
137
138 The special cases are when the address is constant or is
139 a constant plus a fixed register such as the frame pointer
140 or a static chain pointer. When such addresses are stored in,
141 we can tell exactly which other such addresses must be invalidated
142 due to overlap. `invalidate' does this.
143 All expressions that refer to non-constant
144 memory addresses are also invalidated. `invalidate_memory' does this.
145
146 2. If the value changing is a register, all expressions
147 containing references to that register, and only those,
148 must be removed.
149
150 Because searching the entire hash table for expressions that contain
151 a register is very slow, we try to figure out when it isn't necessary.
152 Precisely, this is necessary only when expressions have been
153 entered in the hash table using this register, and then the value has
154 changed, and then another expression wants to be added to refer to
155 the register's new value. This sequence of circumstances is rare
156 within any one basic block.
157
158 The vectors `reg_tick' and `reg_in_table' are used to detect this case.
159 reg_tick[i] is incremented whenever a value is stored in register i.
160 reg_in_table[i] holds -1 if no references to register i have been
161 entered in the table; otherwise, it contains the value reg_tick[i] had
162 when the references were entered. If we want to enter a reference
163 and reg_in_table[i] != reg_tick[i], we must scan and remove old references.
164 Until we want to enter a new entry, the mere fact that the two vectors
165 don't match makes the entries be ignored if anyone tries to match them.
166
167 Registers themselves are entered in the hash table as well as in
168 the equivalent-register chains. However, the vectors `reg_tick'
169 and `reg_in_table' do not apply to expressions which are simple
170 register references. These expressions are removed from the table
171 immediately when they become invalid, and this can be done even if
172 we do not immediately search for all the expressions that refer to
173 the register.
174
175 A CLOBBER rtx in an instruction invalidates its operand for further
176 reuse. A CLOBBER or SET rtx whose operand is a MEM:BLK
177 invalidates everything that resides in memory.
178
179 Related expressions:
180
181 Constant expressions that differ only by an additive integer
182 are called related. When a constant expression is put in
183 the table, the related expression with no constant term
184 is also entered. These are made to point at each other
185 so that it is possible to find out if there exists any
186 register equivalent to an expression related to a given expression. */
187
188 /* One plus largest register number used in this function. */
189
190 static int max_reg;
191
192 /* Length of vectors indexed by quantity number.
193 We know in advance we will not need a quantity number this big. */
194
195 static int max_qty;
196
197 /* Next quantity number to be allocated.
198 This is 1 + the largest number needed so far. */
199
200 static int next_qty;
201
202 /* Indexed by quantity number, gives the first (or last) (pseudo) register
203 in the chain of registers that currently contain this quantity. */
204
205 static int *qty_first_reg;
206 static int *qty_last_reg;
207
208 /* Index by quantity number, gives the mode of the quantity. */
209
210 static enum machine_mode *qty_mode;
211
212 /* Indexed by quantity number, gives the rtx of the constant value of the
213 quantity, or zero if it does not have a known value.
214 A sum of the frame pointer (or arg pointer) plus a constant
215 can also be entered here. */
216
217 static rtx *qty_const;
218
219 /* Indexed by qty number, gives the insn that stored the constant value
220 recorded in `qty_const'. */
221
222 static rtx *qty_const_insn;
223
224 /* The next three variables are used to track when a comparison between a
225 quantity and some constant or register has been passed. In that case, we
226 know the results of the comparison in case we see it again. These variables
227 record a comparison that is known to be true. */
228
229 /* Indexed by qty number, gives the rtx code of a comparison with a known
230 result involving this quantity. If none, it is UNKNOWN. */
231 static enum rtx_code *qty_comparison_code;
232
233 /* Indexed by qty number, gives the constant being compared against in a
234 comparison of known result. If no such comparison, it is undefined.
235 If the comparison is not with a constant, it is zero. */
236
237 static rtx *qty_comparison_const;
238
239 /* Indexed by qty number, gives the quantity being compared against in a
240 comparison of known result. If no such comparison, if it undefined.
241 If the comparison is not with a register, it is -1. */
242
243 static int *qty_comparison_qty;
244
245 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
246 /* For machines that have a CC0, we do not record its value in the hash
247 table since its use is guaranteed to be the insn immediately following
248 its definition and any other insn is presumed to invalidate it.
249
250 Instead, we store below the value last assigned to CC0. If it should
251 happen to be a constant, it is stored in preference to the actual
252 assigned value. In case it is a constant, we store the mode in which
253 the constant should be interpreted. */
254
255 static rtx prev_insn_cc0;
256 static enum machine_mode prev_insn_cc0_mode;
257 #endif
258
259 /* Previous actual insn. 0 if at first insn of basic block. */
260
261 static rtx prev_insn;
262
263 /* Insn being scanned. */
264
265 static rtx this_insn;
266
267 /* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the quantity number
268 of the register's current contents. */
269
270 static int *reg_qty;
271
272 /* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the number of the next (or
273 previous) (pseudo) register in the chain of registers sharing the same
274 value.
275
276 Or -1 if this register is at the end of the chain.
277
278 If reg_qty[N] == N, reg_next_eqv[N] is undefined. */
279
280 static int *reg_next_eqv;
281 static int *reg_prev_eqv;
282
283 /* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the number of times
284 that register has been altered in the current basic block. */
285
286 static int *reg_tick;
287
288 /* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the reg_tick value at which
289 rtx's containing this register are valid in the hash table.
290 If this does not equal the current reg_tick value, such expressions
291 existing in the hash table are invalid.
292 If this is -1, no expressions containing this register have been
293 entered in the table. */
294
295 static int *reg_in_table;
296
297 /* A HARD_REG_SET containing all the hard registers for which there is
298 currently a REG expression in the hash table. Note the difference
299 from the above variables, which indicate if the REG is mentioned in some
300 expression in the table. */
301
302 static HARD_REG_SET hard_regs_in_table;
303
304 /* A HARD_REG_SET containing all the hard registers that are invalidated
305 by a CALL_INSN. */
306
307 static HARD_REG_SET regs_invalidated_by_call;
308
309 /* Two vectors of ints:
310 one containing max_reg -1's; the other max_reg + 500 (an approximation
311 for max_qty) elements where element i contains i.
312 These are used to initialize various other vectors fast. */
313
314 static int *all_minus_one;
315 static int *consec_ints;
316
317 /* CUID of insn that starts the basic block currently being cse-processed. */
318
319 static int cse_basic_block_start;
320
321 /* CUID of insn that ends the basic block currently being cse-processed. */
322
323 static int cse_basic_block_end;
324
325 /* Vector mapping INSN_UIDs to cuids.
326 The cuids are like uids but increase monotonically always.
327 We use them to see whether a reg is used outside a given basic block. */
328
329 static short *uid_cuid;
330
331 /* Get the cuid of an insn. */
332
333 #define INSN_CUID(INSN) (uid_cuid[INSN_UID (INSN)])
334
335 /* Nonzero if cse has altered conditional jump insns
336 in such a way that jump optimization should be redone. */
337
338 static int cse_jumps_altered;
339
340 /* canon_hash stores 1 in do_not_record
341 if it notices a reference to CC0, PC, or some other volatile
342 subexpression. */
343
344 static int do_not_record;
345
346 /* canon_hash stores 1 in hash_arg_in_memory
347 if it notices a reference to memory within the expression being hashed. */
348
349 static int hash_arg_in_memory;
350
351 /* canon_hash stores 1 in hash_arg_in_struct
352 if it notices a reference to memory that's part of a structure. */
353
354 static int hash_arg_in_struct;
355
356 /* The hash table contains buckets which are chains of `struct table_elt's,
357 each recording one expression's information.
358 That expression is in the `exp' field.
359
360 Those elements with the same hash code are chained in both directions
361 through the `next_same_hash' and `prev_same_hash' fields.
362
363 Each set of expressions with equivalent values
364 are on a two-way chain through the `next_same_value'
365 and `prev_same_value' fields, and all point with
366 the `first_same_value' field at the first element in
367 that chain. The chain is in order of increasing cost.
368 Each element's cost value is in its `cost' field.
369
370 The `in_memory' field is nonzero for elements that
371 involve any reference to memory. These elements are removed
372 whenever a write is done to an unidentified location in memory.
373 To be safe, we assume that a memory address is unidentified unless
374 the address is either a symbol constant or a constant plus
375 the frame pointer or argument pointer.
376
377 The `in_struct' field is nonzero for elements that
378 involve any reference to memory inside a structure or array.
379
380 The `related_value' field is used to connect related expressions
381 (that differ by adding an integer).
382 The related expressions are chained in a circular fashion.
383 `related_value' is zero for expressions for which this
384 chain is not useful.
385
386 The `cost' field stores the cost of this element's expression.
387
388 The `is_const' flag is set if the element is a constant (including
389 a fixed address).
390
391 The `flag' field is used as a temporary during some search routines.
392
393 The `mode' field is usually the same as GET_MODE (`exp'), but
394 if `exp' is a CONST_INT and has no machine mode then the `mode'
395 field is the mode it was being used as. Each constant is
396 recorded separately for each mode it is used with. */
397
398
399 struct table_elt
400 {
401 rtx exp;
402 struct table_elt *next_same_hash;
403 struct table_elt *prev_same_hash;
404 struct table_elt *next_same_value;
405 struct table_elt *prev_same_value;
406 struct table_elt *first_same_value;
407 struct table_elt *related_value;
408 int cost;
409 enum machine_mode mode;
410 char in_memory;
411 char in_struct;
412 char is_const;
413 char flag;
414 };
415
416 #define HASHBITS 16
417
418 /* We don't want a lot of buckets, because we rarely have very many
419 things stored in the hash table, and a lot of buckets slows
420 down a lot of loops that happen frequently. */
421 #define NBUCKETS 31
422
423 /* Compute hash code of X in mode M. Special-case case where X is a pseudo
424 register (hard registers may require `do_not_record' to be set). */
425
426 #define HASH(X, M) \
427 (GET_CODE (X) == REG && REGNO (X) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER \
428 ? ((((int) REG << 7) + reg_qty[REGNO (X)]) % NBUCKETS) \
429 : canon_hash (X, M) % NBUCKETS)
430
431 /* Determine whether register number N is considered a fixed register for CSE.
432 It is desirable to replace other regs with fixed regs, to reduce need for
433 non-fixed hard regs.
434 A reg wins if it is either the frame pointer or designated as fixed,
435 but not if it is an overlapping register. */
436 #ifdef OVERLAPPING_REGNO_P
437 #define FIXED_REGNO_P(N) \
438 (((N) == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || fixed_regs[N]) \
439 && ! OVERLAPPING_REGNO_P ((N)))
440 #else
441 #define FIXED_REGNO_P(N) \
442 ((N) == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || fixed_regs[N])
443 #endif
444
445 /* Compute cost of X, as stored in the `cost' field of a table_elt. Fixed
446 hard registers are the cheapest with a cost of 0. Next come pseudos
447 with a cost of one and other hard registers with a cost of 2. Aside
448 from these special cases, call `rtx_cost'. */
449
450 #define COST(X) \
451 (GET_CODE (X) == REG \
452 ? (REGNO (X) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? 1 \
453 : (FIXED_REGNO_P (REGNO (X)) \
454 && REGNO_REG_CLASS (REGNO (X)) != NO_REGS) ? 0 \
455 : 2) \
456 : rtx_cost (X, SET) * 2)
457
458 /* Determine if the quantity number for register X represents a valid index
459 into the `qty_...' variables. */
460
461 #define REGNO_QTY_VALID_P(N) (reg_qty[N] != (N))
462
463 static struct table_elt *table[NBUCKETS];
464
465 /* Chain of `struct table_elt's made so far for this function
466 but currently removed from the table. */
467
468 static struct table_elt *free_element_chain;
469
470 /* Number of `struct table_elt' structures made so far for this function. */
471
472 static int n_elements_made;
473
474 /* Maximum value `n_elements_made' has had so far in this compilation
475 for functions previously processed. */
476
477 static int max_elements_made;
478
479 /* Surviving equivalence class when two equivalence classes are merged
480 by recording the effects of a jump in the last insn. Zero if the
481 last insn was not a conditional jump. */
482
483 static struct table_elt *last_jump_equiv_class;
484
485 /* Set to the cost of a constant pool reference if one was found for a
486 symbolic constant. If this was found, it means we should try to
487 convert constants into constant pool entries if they don't fit in
488 the insn. */
489
490 static int constant_pool_entries_cost;
491
492 /* Bits describing what kind of values in memory must be invalidated
493 for a particular instruction. If all three bits are zero,
494 no memory refs need to be invalidated. Each bit is more powerful
495 than the preceding ones, and if a bit is set then the preceding
496 bits are also set.
497
498 Here is how the bits are set:
499 Pushing onto the stack invalidates only the stack pointer,
500 writing at a fixed address invalidates only variable addresses,
501 writing in a structure element at variable address
502 invalidates all but scalar variables,
503 and writing in anything else at variable address invalidates everything. */
504
505 struct write_data
506 {
507 int sp : 1; /* Invalidate stack pointer. */
508 int var : 1; /* Invalidate variable addresses. */
509 int nonscalar : 1; /* Invalidate all but scalar variables. */
510 int all : 1; /* Invalidate all memory refs. */
511 };
512
513 /* Nonzero if X has the form (PLUS frame-pointer integer). We check for
514 virtual regs here because the simplify_*_operation routines are called
515 by integrate.c, which is called before virtual register instantiation. */
516
517 #define FIXED_BASE_PLUS_P(X) \
518 ((X) == frame_pointer_rtx || (X) == arg_pointer_rtx \
519 || (X) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx \
520 || (X) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx \
521 || (GET_CODE (X) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (X, 1)) == CONST_INT \
522 && (XEXP (X, 0) == frame_pointer_rtx \
523 || XEXP (X, 0) == arg_pointer_rtx \
524 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx \
525 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx)))
526
527 /* Similar, but also allows reference to the stack pointer.
528
529 This used to include FIXED_BASE_PLUS_P, however, we can't assume that
530 arg_pointer_rtx by itself is nonzero, because on at least one machine,
531 the i960, the arg pointer is zero when it is unused. */
532
533 #define NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P(X) \
534 ((X) == frame_pointer_rtx \
535 || (X) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx \
536 || (X) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx \
537 || (GET_CODE (X) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (X, 1)) == CONST_INT \
538 && (XEXP (X, 0) == frame_pointer_rtx \
539 || XEXP (X, 0) == arg_pointer_rtx \
540 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx \
541 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx)) \
542 || (X) == stack_pointer_rtx \
543 || (X) == virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx \
544 || (X) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx \
545 || (GET_CODE (X) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (X, 1)) == CONST_INT \
546 && (XEXP (X, 0) == stack_pointer_rtx \
547 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx \
548 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx)))
549
550 static struct table_elt *lookup ();
551 static void free_element ();
552
553 static int insert_regs ();
554 static void rehash_using_reg ();
555 static void remove_invalid_refs ();
556 static int exp_equiv_p ();
557 int refers_to_p ();
558 int refers_to_mem_p ();
559 static void invalidate_from_clobbers ();
560 static int safe_hash ();
561 static int canon_hash ();
562 static rtx fold_rtx ();
563 static rtx equiv_constant ();
564 static void record_jump_cond ();
565 static void note_mem_written ();
566 static int cse_rtx_addr_varies_p ();
567 static enum rtx_code find_comparison_args ();
568 static void cse_insn ();
569 static void cse_set_around_loop ();
570 \f
571 /* Return an estimate of the cost of computing rtx X.
572 One use is in cse, to decide which expression to keep in the hash table.
573 Another is in rtl generation, to pick the cheapest way to multiply.
574 Other uses like the latter are expected in the future. */
575
576 /* Return the right cost to give to an operation
577 to make the cost of the corresponding register-to-register instruction
578 N times that of a fast register-to-register instruction. */
579
580 #define COSTS_N_INSNS(N) ((N) * 4 - 2)
581
582 int
583 rtx_cost (x, outer_code)
584 rtx x;
585 enum rtx_code outer_code;
586 {
587 register int i, j;
588 register enum rtx_code code;
589 register char *fmt;
590 register int total;
591
592 if (x == 0)
593 return 0;
594
595 /* Compute the default costs of certain things.
596 Note that RTX_COSTS can override the defaults. */
597
598 code = GET_CODE (x);
599 switch (code)
600 {
601 case MULT:
602 /* Count multiplication by 2**n as a shift,
603 because if we are considering it, we would output it as a shift. */
604 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT
605 && exact_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))) >= 0)
606 total = 2;
607 else
608 total = COSTS_N_INSNS (5);
609 break;
610 case DIV:
611 case UDIV:
612 case MOD:
613 case UMOD:
614 total = COSTS_N_INSNS (7);
615 break;
616 case USE:
617 /* Used in loop.c and combine.c as a marker. */
618 total = 0;
619 break;
620 case ASM_OPERANDS:
621 /* We don't want these to be used in substitutions because
622 we have no way of validating the resulting insn. So assign
623 anything containing an ASM_OPERANDS a very high cost. */
624 total = 1000;
625 break;
626 default:
627 total = 2;
628 }
629
630 switch (code)
631 {
632 case REG:
633 return 1;
634 case SUBREG:
635 /* If we can't tie these modes, make this expensive. The larger
636 the mode, the more expensive it is. */
637 if (! MODES_TIEABLE_P (GET_MODE (x), GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))))
638 return COSTS_N_INSNS (2
639 + GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)) / UNITS_PER_WORD);
640 return 2;
641 #ifdef RTX_COSTS
642 RTX_COSTS (x, code, outer_code);
643 #endif
644 CONST_COSTS (x, code, outer_code);
645 }
646
647 /* Sum the costs of the sub-rtx's, plus cost of this operation,
648 which is already in total. */
649
650 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
651 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
652 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
653 total += rtx_cost (XEXP (x, i), code);
654 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
655 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
656 total += rtx_cost (XVECEXP (x, i, j), code);
657
658 return total;
659 }
660 \f
661 /* Clear the hash table and initialize each register with its own quantity,
662 for a new basic block. */
663
664 static void
665 new_basic_block ()
666 {
667 register int i;
668
669 next_qty = max_reg;
670
671 bzero (reg_tick, max_reg * sizeof (int));
672
673 bcopy (all_minus_one, reg_in_table, max_reg * sizeof (int));
674 bcopy (consec_ints, reg_qty, max_reg * sizeof (int));
675 CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (hard_regs_in_table);
676
677 /* The per-quantity values used to be initialized here, but it is
678 much faster to initialize each as it is made in `make_new_qty'. */
679
680 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
681 {
682 register struct table_elt *this, *next;
683 for (this = table[i]; this; this = next)
684 {
685 next = this->next_same_hash;
686 free_element (this);
687 }
688 }
689
690 bzero (table, sizeof table);
691
692 prev_insn = 0;
693
694 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
695 prev_insn_cc0 = 0;
696 #endif
697 }
698
699 /* Say that register REG contains a quantity not in any register before
700 and initialize that quantity. */
701
702 static void
703 make_new_qty (reg)
704 register int reg;
705 {
706 register int q;
707
708 if (next_qty >= max_qty)
709 abort ();
710
711 q = reg_qty[reg] = next_qty++;
712 qty_first_reg[q] = reg;
713 qty_last_reg[q] = reg;
714 qty_const[q] = qty_const_insn[q] = 0;
715 qty_comparison_code[q] = UNKNOWN;
716
717 reg_next_eqv[reg] = reg_prev_eqv[reg] = -1;
718 }
719
720 /* Make reg NEW equivalent to reg OLD.
721 OLD is not changing; NEW is. */
722
723 static void
724 make_regs_eqv (new, old)
725 register int new, old;
726 {
727 register int lastr, firstr;
728 register int q = reg_qty[old];
729
730 /* Nothing should become eqv until it has a "non-invalid" qty number. */
731 if (! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (old))
732 abort ();
733
734 reg_qty[new] = q;
735 firstr = qty_first_reg[q];
736 lastr = qty_last_reg[q];
737
738 /* Prefer fixed hard registers to anything. Prefer pseudo regs to other
739 hard regs. Among pseudos, if NEW will live longer than any other reg
740 of the same qty, and that is beyond the current basic block,
741 make it the new canonical replacement for this qty. */
742 if (! (firstr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && FIXED_REGNO_P (firstr))
743 /* Certain fixed registers might be of the class NO_REGS. This means
744 that not only can they not be allocated by the compiler, but
745 they cannot be used in substitutions or canonicalizations
746 either. */
747 && (new >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER || REGNO_REG_CLASS (new) != NO_REGS)
748 && ((new < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && FIXED_REGNO_P (new))
749 || (new >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
750 && (firstr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
751 || ((uid_cuid[regno_last_uid[new]] > cse_basic_block_end
752 || (uid_cuid[regno_first_uid[new]]
753 < cse_basic_block_start))
754 && (uid_cuid[regno_last_uid[new]]
755 > uid_cuid[regno_last_uid[firstr]]))))))
756 {
757 reg_prev_eqv[firstr] = new;
758 reg_next_eqv[new] = firstr;
759 reg_prev_eqv[new] = -1;
760 qty_first_reg[q] = new;
761 }
762 else
763 {
764 /* If NEW is a hard reg (known to be non-fixed), insert at end.
765 Otherwise, insert before any non-fixed hard regs that are at the
766 end. Registers of class NO_REGS cannot be used as an
767 equivalent for anything. */
768 while (lastr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && reg_prev_eqv[lastr] >= 0
769 && (REGNO_REG_CLASS (lastr) == NO_REGS || ! FIXED_REGNO_P (lastr))
770 && new >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
771 lastr = reg_prev_eqv[lastr];
772 reg_next_eqv[new] = reg_next_eqv[lastr];
773 if (reg_next_eqv[lastr] >= 0)
774 reg_prev_eqv[reg_next_eqv[lastr]] = new;
775 else
776 qty_last_reg[q] = new;
777 reg_next_eqv[lastr] = new;
778 reg_prev_eqv[new] = lastr;
779 }
780 }
781
782 /* Remove REG from its equivalence class. */
783
784 static void
785 delete_reg_equiv (reg)
786 register int reg;
787 {
788 register int n = reg_next_eqv[reg];
789 register int p = reg_prev_eqv[reg];
790 register int q = reg_qty[reg];
791
792 /* If invalid, do nothing. N and P above are undefined in that case. */
793 if (q == reg)
794 return;
795
796 if (n != -1)
797 reg_prev_eqv[n] = p;
798 else
799 qty_last_reg[q] = p;
800 if (p != -1)
801 reg_next_eqv[p] = n;
802 else
803 qty_first_reg[q] = n;
804
805 reg_qty[reg] = reg;
806 }
807
808 /* Remove any invalid expressions from the hash table
809 that refer to any of the registers contained in expression X.
810
811 Make sure that newly inserted references to those registers
812 as subexpressions will be considered valid.
813
814 mention_regs is not called when a register itself
815 is being stored in the table.
816
817 Return 1 if we have done something that may have changed the hash code
818 of X. */
819
820 static int
821 mention_regs (x)
822 rtx x;
823 {
824 register enum rtx_code code;
825 register int i, j;
826 register char *fmt;
827 register int changed = 0;
828
829 if (x == 0)
830 return 0;
831
832 code = GET_CODE (x);
833 if (code == REG)
834 {
835 register int regno = REGNO (x);
836 register int endregno
837 = regno + (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? 1
838 : HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x)));
839 int i;
840
841 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
842 {
843 if (reg_in_table[i] >= 0 && reg_in_table[i] != reg_tick[i])
844 remove_invalid_refs (i);
845
846 reg_in_table[i] = reg_tick[i];
847 }
848
849 return 0;
850 }
851
852 /* If X is a comparison or a COMPARE and either operand is a register
853 that does not have a quantity, give it one. This is so that a later
854 call to record_jump_equiv won't cause X to be assigned a different
855 hash code and not found in the table after that call.
856
857 It is not necessary to do this here, since rehash_using_reg can
858 fix up the table later, but doing this here eliminates the need to
859 call that expensive function in the most common case where the only
860 use of the register is in the comparison. */
861
862 if (code == COMPARE || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == '<')
863 {
864 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == REG
865 && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))))
866 if (insert_regs (XEXP (x, 0), 0, 0))
867 {
868 rehash_using_reg (XEXP (x, 0));
869 changed = 1;
870 }
871
872 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == REG
873 && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 1))))
874 if (insert_regs (XEXP (x, 1), 0, 0))
875 {
876 rehash_using_reg (XEXP (x, 1));
877 changed = 1;
878 }
879 }
880
881 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
882 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
883 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
884 changed |= mention_regs (XEXP (x, i));
885 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
886 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
887 changed |= mention_regs (XVECEXP (x, i, j));
888
889 return changed;
890 }
891
892 /* Update the register quantities for inserting X into the hash table
893 with a value equivalent to CLASSP.
894 (If the class does not contain a REG, it is irrelevant.)
895 If MODIFIED is nonzero, X is a destination; it is being modified.
896 Note that delete_reg_equiv should be called on a register
897 before insert_regs is done on that register with MODIFIED != 0.
898
899 Nonzero value means that elements of reg_qty have changed
900 so X's hash code may be different. */
901
902 static int
903 insert_regs (x, classp, modified)
904 rtx x;
905 struct table_elt *classp;
906 int modified;
907 {
908 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
909 {
910 register int regno = REGNO (x);
911
912 if (modified
913 || ! (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (regno)
914 && qty_mode[reg_qty[regno]] == GET_MODE (x)))
915 {
916 if (classp)
917 for (classp = classp->first_same_value;
918 classp != 0;
919 classp = classp->next_same_value)
920 if (GET_CODE (classp->exp) == REG
921 && GET_MODE (classp->exp) == GET_MODE (x))
922 {
923 make_regs_eqv (regno, REGNO (classp->exp));
924 return 1;
925 }
926
927 make_new_qty (regno);
928 qty_mode[reg_qty[regno]] = GET_MODE (x);
929 return 1;
930 }
931 }
932 else
933 return mention_regs (x);
934 }
935 \f
936 /* Look in or update the hash table. */
937
938 /* Put the element ELT on the list of free elements. */
939
940 static void
941 free_element (elt)
942 struct table_elt *elt;
943 {
944 elt->next_same_hash = free_element_chain;
945 free_element_chain = elt;
946 }
947
948 /* Return an element that is free for use. */
949
950 static struct table_elt *
951 get_element ()
952 {
953 struct table_elt *elt = free_element_chain;
954 if (elt)
955 {
956 free_element_chain = elt->next_same_hash;
957 return elt;
958 }
959 n_elements_made++;
960 return (struct table_elt *) oballoc (sizeof (struct table_elt));
961 }
962
963 /* Remove table element ELT from use in the table.
964 HASH is its hash code, made using the HASH macro.
965 It's an argument because often that is known in advance
966 and we save much time not recomputing it. */
967
968 static void
969 remove_from_table (elt, hash)
970 register struct table_elt *elt;
971 int hash;
972 {
973 if (elt == 0)
974 return;
975
976 /* Mark this element as removed. See cse_insn. */
977 elt->first_same_value = 0;
978
979 /* Remove the table element from its equivalence class. */
980
981 {
982 register struct table_elt *prev = elt->prev_same_value;
983 register struct table_elt *next = elt->next_same_value;
984
985 if (next) next->prev_same_value = prev;
986
987 if (prev)
988 prev->next_same_value = next;
989 else
990 {
991 register struct table_elt *newfirst = next;
992 while (next)
993 {
994 next->first_same_value = newfirst;
995 next = next->next_same_value;
996 }
997 }
998 }
999
1000 /* Remove the table element from its hash bucket. */
1001
1002 {
1003 register struct table_elt *prev = elt->prev_same_hash;
1004 register struct table_elt *next = elt->next_same_hash;
1005
1006 if (next) next->prev_same_hash = prev;
1007
1008 if (prev)
1009 prev->next_same_hash = next;
1010 else if (table[hash] == elt)
1011 table[hash] = next;
1012 else
1013 {
1014 /* This entry is not in the proper hash bucket. This can happen
1015 when two classes were merged by `merge_equiv_classes'. Search
1016 for the hash bucket that it heads. This happens only very
1017 rarely, so the cost is acceptable. */
1018 for (hash = 0; hash < NBUCKETS; hash++)
1019 if (table[hash] == elt)
1020 table[hash] = next;
1021 }
1022 }
1023
1024 /* Remove the table element from its related-value circular chain. */
1025
1026 if (elt->related_value != 0 && elt->related_value != elt)
1027 {
1028 register struct table_elt *p = elt->related_value;
1029 while (p->related_value != elt)
1030 p = p->related_value;
1031 p->related_value = elt->related_value;
1032 if (p->related_value == p)
1033 p->related_value = 0;
1034 }
1035
1036 free_element (elt);
1037 }
1038
1039 /* Look up X in the hash table and return its table element,
1040 or 0 if X is not in the table.
1041
1042 MODE is the machine-mode of X, or if X is an integer constant
1043 with VOIDmode then MODE is the mode with which X will be used.
1044
1045 Here we are satisfied to find an expression whose tree structure
1046 looks like X. */
1047
1048 static struct table_elt *
1049 lookup (x, hash, mode)
1050 rtx x;
1051 int hash;
1052 enum machine_mode mode;
1053 {
1054 register struct table_elt *p;
1055
1056 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
1057 if (mode == p->mode && ((x == p->exp && GET_CODE (x) == REG)
1058 || exp_equiv_p (x, p->exp, GET_CODE (x) != REG, 0)))
1059 return p;
1060
1061 return 0;
1062 }
1063
1064 /* Like `lookup' but don't care whether the table element uses invalid regs.
1065 Also ignore discrepancies in the machine mode of a register. */
1066
1067 static struct table_elt *
1068 lookup_for_remove (x, hash, mode)
1069 rtx x;
1070 int hash;
1071 enum machine_mode mode;
1072 {
1073 register struct table_elt *p;
1074
1075 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
1076 {
1077 int regno = REGNO (x);
1078 /* Don't check the machine mode when comparing registers;
1079 invalidating (REG:SI 0) also invalidates (REG:DF 0). */
1080 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
1081 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG
1082 && REGNO (p->exp) == regno)
1083 return p;
1084 }
1085 else
1086 {
1087 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
1088 if (mode == p->mode && (x == p->exp || exp_equiv_p (x, p->exp, 0, 0)))
1089 return p;
1090 }
1091
1092 return 0;
1093 }
1094
1095 /* Look for an expression equivalent to X and with code CODE.
1096 If one is found, return that expression. */
1097
1098 static rtx
1099 lookup_as_function (x, code)
1100 rtx x;
1101 enum rtx_code code;
1102 {
1103 register struct table_elt *p = lookup (x, safe_hash (x, VOIDmode) % NBUCKETS,
1104 GET_MODE (x));
1105 if (p == 0)
1106 return 0;
1107
1108 for (p = p->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
1109 {
1110 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == code
1111 /* Make sure this is a valid entry in the table. */
1112 && exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
1113 return p->exp;
1114 }
1115
1116 return 0;
1117 }
1118
1119 /* Insert X in the hash table, assuming HASH is its hash code
1120 and CLASSP is an element of the class it should go in
1121 (or 0 if a new class should be made).
1122 It is inserted at the proper position to keep the class in
1123 the order cheapest first.
1124
1125 MODE is the machine-mode of X, or if X is an integer constant
1126 with VOIDmode then MODE is the mode with which X will be used.
1127
1128 For elements of equal cheapness, the most recent one
1129 goes in front, except that the first element in the list
1130 remains first unless a cheaper element is added. The order of
1131 pseudo-registers does not matter, as canon_reg will be called to
1132 find the cheapest when a register is retrieved from the table.
1133
1134 The in_memory field in the hash table element is set to 0.
1135 The caller must set it nonzero if appropriate.
1136
1137 You should call insert_regs (X, CLASSP, MODIFY) before calling here,
1138 and if insert_regs returns a nonzero value
1139 you must then recompute its hash code before calling here.
1140
1141 If necessary, update table showing constant values of quantities. */
1142
1143 #define CHEAPER(X,Y) ((X)->cost < (Y)->cost)
1144
1145 static struct table_elt *
1146 insert (x, classp, hash, mode)
1147 register rtx x;
1148 register struct table_elt *classp;
1149 int hash;
1150 enum machine_mode mode;
1151 {
1152 register struct table_elt *elt;
1153
1154 /* If X is a register and we haven't made a quantity for it,
1155 something is wrong. */
1156 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)))
1157 abort ();
1158
1159 /* If X is a hard register, show it is being put in the table. */
1160 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1161 {
1162 int regno = REGNO (x);
1163 int endregno = regno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x));
1164 int i;
1165
1166 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
1167 SET_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, i);
1168 }
1169
1170
1171 /* Put an element for X into the right hash bucket. */
1172
1173 elt = get_element ();
1174 elt->exp = x;
1175 elt->cost = COST (x);
1176 elt->next_same_value = 0;
1177 elt->prev_same_value = 0;
1178 elt->next_same_hash = table[hash];
1179 elt->prev_same_hash = 0;
1180 elt->related_value = 0;
1181 elt->in_memory = 0;
1182 elt->mode = mode;
1183 elt->is_const = (CONSTANT_P (x)
1184 /* GNU C++ takes advantage of this for `this'
1185 (and other const values). */
1186 || (RTX_UNCHANGING_P (x)
1187 && GET_CODE (x) == REG
1188 && REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1189 || FIXED_BASE_PLUS_P (x));
1190
1191 if (table[hash])
1192 table[hash]->prev_same_hash = elt;
1193 table[hash] = elt;
1194
1195 /* Put it into the proper value-class. */
1196 if (classp)
1197 {
1198 classp = classp->first_same_value;
1199 if (CHEAPER (elt, classp))
1200 /* Insert at the head of the class */
1201 {
1202 register struct table_elt *p;
1203 elt->next_same_value = classp;
1204 classp->prev_same_value = elt;
1205 elt->first_same_value = elt;
1206
1207 for (p = classp; p; p = p->next_same_value)
1208 p->first_same_value = elt;
1209 }
1210 else
1211 {
1212 /* Insert not at head of the class. */
1213 /* Put it after the last element cheaper than X. */
1214 register struct table_elt *p, *next;
1215 for (p = classp; (next = p->next_same_value) && CHEAPER (next, elt);
1216 p = next);
1217 /* Put it after P and before NEXT. */
1218 elt->next_same_value = next;
1219 if (next)
1220 next->prev_same_value = elt;
1221 elt->prev_same_value = p;
1222 p->next_same_value = elt;
1223 elt->first_same_value = classp;
1224 }
1225 }
1226 else
1227 elt->first_same_value = elt;
1228
1229 /* If this is a constant being set equivalent to a register or a register
1230 being set equivalent to a constant, note the constant equivalence.
1231
1232 If this is a constant, it cannot be equivalent to a different constant,
1233 and a constant is the only thing that can be cheaper than a register. So
1234 we know the register is the head of the class (before the constant was
1235 inserted).
1236
1237 If this is a register that is not already known equivalent to a
1238 constant, we must check the entire class.
1239
1240 If this is a register that is already known equivalent to an insn,
1241 update `qty_const_insn' to show that `this_insn' is the latest
1242 insn making that quantity equivalent to the constant. */
1243
1244 if (elt->is_const && classp && GET_CODE (classp->exp) == REG)
1245 {
1246 qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (classp->exp)]]
1247 = gen_lowpart_if_possible (qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (classp->exp)]], x);
1248 qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (classp->exp)]] = this_insn;
1249 }
1250
1251 else if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && classp && ! qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]])
1252 {
1253 register struct table_elt *p;
1254
1255 for (p = classp; p != 0; p = p->next_same_value)
1256 {
1257 if (p->is_const)
1258 {
1259 qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]
1260 = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (x), p->exp);
1261 qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]] = this_insn;
1262 break;
1263 }
1264 }
1265 }
1266
1267 else if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]
1268 && GET_MODE (x) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]])
1269 qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]] = this_insn;
1270
1271 /* If this is a constant with symbolic value,
1272 and it has a term with an explicit integer value,
1273 link it up with related expressions. */
1274 if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST)
1275 {
1276 rtx subexp = get_related_value (x);
1277 int subhash;
1278 struct table_elt *subelt, *subelt_prev;
1279
1280 if (subexp != 0)
1281 {
1282 /* Get the integer-free subexpression in the hash table. */
1283 subhash = safe_hash (subexp, mode) % NBUCKETS;
1284 subelt = lookup (subexp, subhash, mode);
1285 if (subelt == 0)
1286 subelt = insert (subexp, 0, subhash, mode);
1287 /* Initialize SUBELT's circular chain if it has none. */
1288 if (subelt->related_value == 0)
1289 subelt->related_value = subelt;
1290 /* Find the element in the circular chain that precedes SUBELT. */
1291 subelt_prev = subelt;
1292 while (subelt_prev->related_value != subelt)
1293 subelt_prev = subelt_prev->related_value;
1294 /* Put new ELT into SUBELT's circular chain just before SUBELT.
1295 This way the element that follows SUBELT is the oldest one. */
1296 elt->related_value = subelt_prev->related_value;
1297 subelt_prev->related_value = elt;
1298 }
1299 }
1300
1301 return elt;
1302 }
1303 \f
1304 /* Given two equivalence classes, CLASS1 and CLASS2, put all the entries from
1305 CLASS2 into CLASS1. This is done when we have reached an insn which makes
1306 the two classes equivalent.
1307
1308 CLASS1 will be the surviving class; CLASS2 should not be used after this
1309 call.
1310
1311 Any invalid entries in CLASS2 will not be copied. */
1312
1313 static void
1314 merge_equiv_classes (class1, class2)
1315 struct table_elt *class1, *class2;
1316 {
1317 struct table_elt *elt, *next, *new;
1318
1319 /* Ensure we start with the head of the classes. */
1320 class1 = class1->first_same_value;
1321 class2 = class2->first_same_value;
1322
1323 /* If they were already equal, forget it. */
1324 if (class1 == class2)
1325 return;
1326
1327 for (elt = class2; elt; elt = next)
1328 {
1329 int hash;
1330 rtx exp = elt->exp;
1331 enum machine_mode mode = elt->mode;
1332
1333 next = elt->next_same_value;
1334
1335 /* Remove old entry, make a new one in CLASS1's class.
1336 Don't do this for invalid entries as we cannot find their
1337 hash code (it also isn't necessary). */
1338 if (GET_CODE (exp) == REG || exp_equiv_p (exp, exp, 1, 0))
1339 {
1340 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
1341 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
1342 hash = HASH (exp, mode);
1343
1344 if (GET_CODE (exp) == REG)
1345 delete_reg_equiv (REGNO (exp));
1346
1347 remove_from_table (elt, hash);
1348
1349 if (insert_regs (exp, class1, 0))
1350 hash = HASH (exp, mode);
1351 new = insert (exp, class1, hash, mode);
1352 new->in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
1353 new->in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
1354 }
1355 }
1356 }
1357 \f
1358 /* Remove from the hash table, or mark as invalid,
1359 all expressions whose values could be altered by storing in X.
1360 X is a register, a subreg, or a memory reference with nonvarying address
1361 (because, when a memory reference with a varying address is stored in,
1362 all memory references are removed by invalidate_memory
1363 so specific invalidation is superfluous).
1364
1365 A nonvarying address may be just a register or just
1366 a symbol reference, or it may be either of those plus
1367 a numeric offset. */
1368
1369 static void
1370 invalidate (x)
1371 rtx x;
1372 {
1373 register int i;
1374 register struct table_elt *p;
1375 register rtx base;
1376 register int start, end;
1377
1378 /* If X is a register, dependencies on its contents
1379 are recorded through the qty number mechanism.
1380 Just change the qty number of the register,
1381 mark it as invalid for expressions that refer to it,
1382 and remove it itself. */
1383
1384 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
1385 {
1386 register int regno = REGNO (x);
1387 register int hash = HASH (x, GET_MODE (x));
1388
1389 /* Remove REGNO from any quantity list it might be on and indicate
1390 that it's value might have changed. If it is a pseudo, remove its
1391 entry from the hash table.
1392
1393 For a hard register, we do the first two actions above for any
1394 additional hard registers corresponding to X. Then, if any of these
1395 registers are in the table, we must remove any REG entries that
1396 overlap these registers. */
1397
1398 delete_reg_equiv (regno);
1399 reg_tick[regno]++;
1400
1401 if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1402 remove_from_table (lookup_for_remove (x, hash, GET_MODE (x)), hash);
1403 else
1404 {
1405 int in_table = TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
1406 int endregno = regno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x));
1407 int tregno, tendregno;
1408 register struct table_elt *p, *next;
1409
1410 CLEAR_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
1411
1412 for (i = regno + 1; i < endregno; i++)
1413 {
1414 in_table |= TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, i);
1415 CLEAR_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, i);
1416 delete_reg_equiv (i);
1417 reg_tick[i]++;
1418 }
1419
1420 if (in_table)
1421 for (hash = 0; hash < NBUCKETS; hash++)
1422 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = next)
1423 {
1424 next = p->next_same_hash;
1425
1426 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG
1427 || REGNO (p->exp) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1428 continue;
1429
1430 tregno = REGNO (p->exp);
1431 tendregno
1432 = tregno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (tregno, GET_MODE (p->exp));
1433 if (tendregno > regno && tregno < endregno)
1434 remove_from_table (p, hash);
1435 }
1436 }
1437
1438 return;
1439 }
1440
1441 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
1442 {
1443 if (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) != REG)
1444 abort ();
1445 invalidate (SUBREG_REG (x));
1446 return;
1447 }
1448
1449 /* X is not a register; it must be a memory reference with
1450 a nonvarying address. Remove all hash table elements
1451 that refer to overlapping pieces of memory. */
1452
1453 if (GET_CODE (x) != MEM)
1454 abort ();
1455 base = XEXP (x, 0);
1456 start = 0;
1457
1458 /* Registers with nonvarying addresses usually have constant equivalents;
1459 but the frame pointer register is also possible. */
1460 if (GET_CODE (base) == REG
1461 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (base))
1462 && qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (base)]] == GET_MODE (base)
1463 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (base)]] != 0)
1464 base = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (base)]];
1465 else if (GET_CODE (base) == PLUS
1466 && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT
1467 && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 0)) == REG
1468 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (base, 0)))
1469 && (qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (base, 0))]]
1470 == GET_MODE (XEXP (base, 0)))
1471 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (base, 0))]])
1472 {
1473 start = INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1));
1474 base = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (base, 0))]];
1475 }
1476
1477 if (GET_CODE (base) == CONST)
1478 base = XEXP (base, 0);
1479 if (GET_CODE (base) == PLUS
1480 && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT)
1481 {
1482 start += INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1));
1483 base = XEXP (base, 0);
1484 }
1485
1486 end = start + GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x));
1487 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
1488 {
1489 register struct table_elt *next;
1490 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1491 {
1492 next = p->next_same_hash;
1493 if (refers_to_mem_p (p->exp, base, start, end))
1494 remove_from_table (p, i);
1495 }
1496 }
1497 }
1498
1499 /* Remove all expressions that refer to register REGNO,
1500 since they are already invalid, and we are about to
1501 mark that register valid again and don't want the old
1502 expressions to reappear as valid. */
1503
1504 static void
1505 remove_invalid_refs (regno)
1506 int regno;
1507 {
1508 register int i;
1509 register struct table_elt *p, *next;
1510
1511 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
1512 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1513 {
1514 next = p->next_same_hash;
1515 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG
1516 && refers_to_regno_p (regno, regno + 1, p->exp, 0))
1517 remove_from_table (p, i);
1518 }
1519 }
1520 \f
1521 /* Recompute the hash codes of any valid entries in the hash table that
1522 reference X, if X is a register, or SUBREG_REG (X) if X is a SUBREG.
1523
1524 This is called when we make a jump equivalence. */
1525
1526 static void
1527 rehash_using_reg (x)
1528 rtx x;
1529 {
1530 int i;
1531 struct table_elt *p, *next;
1532 int hash;
1533
1534 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
1535 x = SUBREG_REG (x);
1536
1537 /* If X is not a register or if the register is known not to be in any
1538 valid entries in the table, we have no work to do. */
1539
1540 if (GET_CODE (x) != REG
1541 || reg_in_table[REGNO (x)] < 0
1542 || reg_in_table[REGNO (x)] != reg_tick[REGNO (x)])
1543 return;
1544
1545 /* Scan all hash chains looking for valid entries that mention X.
1546 If we find one and it is in the wrong hash chain, move it. We can skip
1547 objects that are registers, since they are handled specially. */
1548
1549 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
1550 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1551 {
1552 next = p->next_same_hash;
1553 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG && reg_mentioned_p (x, p->exp)
1554 && exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0)
1555 && i != (hash = safe_hash (p->exp, p->mode) % NBUCKETS))
1556 {
1557 if (p->next_same_hash)
1558 p->next_same_hash->prev_same_hash = p->prev_same_hash;
1559
1560 if (p->prev_same_hash)
1561 p->prev_same_hash->next_same_hash = p->next_same_hash;
1562 else
1563 table[i] = p->next_same_hash;
1564
1565 p->next_same_hash = table[hash];
1566 p->prev_same_hash = 0;
1567 if (table[hash])
1568 table[hash]->prev_same_hash = p;
1569 table[hash] = p;
1570 }
1571 }
1572 }
1573 \f
1574 /* Remove from the hash table all expressions that reference memory,
1575 or some of them as specified by *WRITES. */
1576
1577 static void
1578 invalidate_memory (writes)
1579 struct write_data *writes;
1580 {
1581 register int i;
1582 register struct table_elt *p, *next;
1583 int all = writes->all;
1584 int nonscalar = writes->nonscalar;
1585
1586 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
1587 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1588 {
1589 next = p->next_same_hash;
1590 if (p->in_memory
1591 && (all
1592 || (nonscalar && p->in_struct)
1593 || cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (p->exp)))
1594 remove_from_table (p, i);
1595 }
1596 }
1597 \f
1598 /* Remove from the hash table any expression that is a call-clobbered
1599 register. Also update their TICK values. */
1600
1601 static void
1602 invalidate_for_call ()
1603 {
1604 int regno, endregno;
1605 int i;
1606 int hash;
1607 struct table_elt *p, *next;
1608 int in_table = 0;
1609
1610 /* Go through all the hard registers. For each that is clobbered in
1611 a CALL_INSN, remove the register from quantity chains and update
1612 reg_tick if defined. Also see if any of these registers is currently
1613 in the table. */
1614
1615 for (regno = 0; regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER; regno++)
1616 if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (regs_invalidated_by_call, regno))
1617 {
1618 delete_reg_equiv (regno);
1619 if (reg_tick[regno] >= 0)
1620 reg_tick[regno]++;
1621
1622 in_table |= TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
1623 }
1624
1625 /* In the case where we have no call-clobbered hard registers in the
1626 table, we are done. Otherwise, scan the table and remove any
1627 entry that overlaps a call-clobbered register. */
1628
1629 if (in_table)
1630 for (hash = 0; hash < NBUCKETS; hash++)
1631 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = next)
1632 {
1633 next = p->next_same_hash;
1634
1635 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG
1636 || REGNO (p->exp) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1637 continue;
1638
1639 regno = REGNO (p->exp);
1640 endregno = regno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (p->exp));
1641
1642 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
1643 if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (regs_invalidated_by_call, i))
1644 {
1645 remove_from_table (p, hash);
1646 break;
1647 }
1648 }
1649 }
1650 \f
1651 /* Given an expression X of type CONST,
1652 and ELT which is its table entry (or 0 if it
1653 is not in the hash table),
1654 return an alternate expression for X as a register plus integer.
1655 If none can be found, return 0. */
1656
1657 static rtx
1658 use_related_value (x, elt)
1659 rtx x;
1660 struct table_elt *elt;
1661 {
1662 register struct table_elt *relt = 0;
1663 register struct table_elt *p, *q;
1664 int offset;
1665
1666 /* First, is there anything related known?
1667 If we have a table element, we can tell from that.
1668 Otherwise, must look it up. */
1669
1670 if (elt != 0 && elt->related_value != 0)
1671 relt = elt;
1672 else if (elt == 0 && GET_CODE (x) == CONST)
1673 {
1674 rtx subexp = get_related_value (x);
1675 if (subexp != 0)
1676 relt = lookup (subexp,
1677 safe_hash (subexp, GET_MODE (subexp)) % NBUCKETS,
1678 GET_MODE (subexp));
1679 }
1680
1681 if (relt == 0)
1682 return 0;
1683
1684 /* Search all related table entries for one that has an
1685 equivalent register. */
1686
1687 p = relt;
1688 while (1)
1689 {
1690 /* This loop is strange in that it is executed in two different cases.
1691 The first is when X is already in the table. Then it is searching
1692 the RELATED_VALUE list of X's class (RELT). The second case is when
1693 X is not in the table. Then RELT points to a class for the related
1694 value.
1695
1696 Ensure that, whatever case we are in, that we ignore classes that have
1697 the same value as X. */
1698
1699 if (rtx_equal_p (x, p->exp))
1700 q = 0;
1701 else
1702 for (q = p->first_same_value; q; q = q->next_same_value)
1703 if (GET_CODE (q->exp) == REG)
1704 break;
1705
1706 if (q)
1707 break;
1708
1709 p = p->related_value;
1710
1711 /* We went all the way around, so there is nothing to be found.
1712 Alternatively, perhaps RELT was in the table for some other reason
1713 and it has no related values recorded. */
1714 if (p == relt || p == 0)
1715 break;
1716 }
1717
1718 if (q == 0)
1719 return 0;
1720
1721 offset = (get_integer_term (x) - get_integer_term (p->exp));
1722 /* Note: OFFSET may be 0 if P->xexp and X are related by commutativity. */
1723 return plus_constant (q->exp, offset);
1724 }
1725 \f
1726 /* Hash an rtx. We are careful to make sure the value is never negative.
1727 Equivalent registers hash identically.
1728 MODE is used in hashing for CONST_INTs only;
1729 otherwise the mode of X is used.
1730
1731 Store 1 in do_not_record if any subexpression is volatile.
1732
1733 Store 1 in hash_arg_in_memory if X contains a MEM rtx
1734 which does not have the RTX_UNCHANGING_P bit set.
1735 In this case, also store 1 in hash_arg_in_struct
1736 if there is a MEM rtx which has the MEM_IN_STRUCT_P bit set.
1737
1738 Note that cse_insn knows that the hash code of a MEM expression
1739 is just (int) MEM plus the hash code of the address. */
1740
1741 static int
1742 canon_hash (x, mode)
1743 rtx x;
1744 enum machine_mode mode;
1745 {
1746 register int i, j;
1747 register int hash = 0;
1748 register enum rtx_code code;
1749 register char *fmt;
1750
1751 /* repeat is used to turn tail-recursion into iteration. */
1752 repeat:
1753 if (x == 0)
1754 return hash;
1755
1756 code = GET_CODE (x);
1757 switch (code)
1758 {
1759 case REG:
1760 {
1761 register int regno = REGNO (x);
1762
1763 /* On some machines, we can't record any non-fixed hard register,
1764 because extending its life will cause reload problems. We
1765 consider ap, fp, and sp to be fixed for this purpose.
1766 On all machines, we can't record any global registers. */
1767
1768 if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1769 && (global_regs[regno]
1770 #ifdef SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES
1771 || (! fixed_regs[regno]
1772 && regno != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
1773 && regno != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
1774 && regno != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM)
1775 #endif
1776 ))
1777 {
1778 do_not_record = 1;
1779 return 0;
1780 }
1781 return hash + ((int) REG << 7) + reg_qty[regno];
1782 }
1783
1784 case CONST_INT:
1785 hash += ((int) mode + ((int) CONST_INT << 7)
1786 + INTVAL (x) + (INTVAL (x) >> HASHBITS));
1787 return ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1) & hash;
1788
1789 case CONST_DOUBLE:
1790 /* This is like the general case, except that it only counts
1791 the integers representing the constant. */
1792 hash += (int) code + (int) GET_MODE (x);
1793 {
1794 int i;
1795 for (i = 2; i < GET_RTX_LENGTH (CONST_DOUBLE); i++)
1796 {
1797 int tem = XINT (x, i);
1798 hash += ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1) & (tem + (tem >> HASHBITS));
1799 }
1800 }
1801 return hash;
1802
1803 /* Assume there is only one rtx object for any given label. */
1804 case LABEL_REF:
1805 /* Use `and' to ensure a positive number. */
1806 return (hash + ((int) LABEL_REF << 7)
1807 + ((int) XEXP (x, 0) & ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1)));
1808
1809 case SYMBOL_REF:
1810 return (hash + ((int) SYMBOL_REF << 7)
1811 + ((int) XEXP (x, 0) & ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1)));
1812
1813 case MEM:
1814 if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x))
1815 {
1816 do_not_record = 1;
1817 return 0;
1818 }
1819 if (! RTX_UNCHANGING_P (x))
1820 {
1821 hash_arg_in_memory = 1;
1822 if (MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (x)) hash_arg_in_struct = 1;
1823 }
1824 /* Now that we have already found this special case,
1825 might as well speed it up as much as possible. */
1826 hash += (int) MEM;
1827 x = XEXP (x, 0);
1828 goto repeat;
1829
1830 case PRE_DEC:
1831 case PRE_INC:
1832 case POST_DEC:
1833 case POST_INC:
1834 case PC:
1835 case CC0:
1836 case CALL:
1837 case UNSPEC_VOLATILE:
1838 do_not_record = 1;
1839 return 0;
1840
1841 case ASM_OPERANDS:
1842 if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x))
1843 {
1844 do_not_record = 1;
1845 return 0;
1846 }
1847 }
1848
1849 i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1;
1850 hash += (int) code + (int) GET_MODE (x);
1851 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
1852 for (; i >= 0; i--)
1853 {
1854 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
1855 {
1856 rtx tem = XEXP (x, i);
1857 rtx tem1;
1858
1859 /* If the operand is a REG that is equivalent to a constant, hash
1860 as if we were hashing the constant, since we will be comparing
1861 that way. */
1862 if (tem != 0 && GET_CODE (tem) == REG
1863 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (tem))
1864 && qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (tem)]] == GET_MODE (tem)
1865 && (tem1 = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (tem)]]) != 0
1866 && CONSTANT_P (tem1))
1867 tem = tem1;
1868
1869 /* If we are about to do the last recursive call
1870 needed at this level, change it into iteration.
1871 This function is called enough to be worth it. */
1872 if (i == 0)
1873 {
1874 x = tem;
1875 goto repeat;
1876 }
1877 hash += canon_hash (tem, 0);
1878 }
1879 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
1880 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
1881 hash += canon_hash (XVECEXP (x, i, j), 0);
1882 else if (fmt[i] == 's')
1883 {
1884 register char *p = XSTR (x, i);
1885 if (p)
1886 while (*p)
1887 {
1888 register int tem = *p++;
1889 hash += ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1) & (tem + (tem >> HASHBITS));
1890 }
1891 }
1892 else if (fmt[i] == 'i')
1893 {
1894 register int tem = XINT (x, i);
1895 hash += ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1) & (tem + (tem >> HASHBITS));
1896 }
1897 else
1898 abort ();
1899 }
1900 return hash;
1901 }
1902
1903 /* Like canon_hash but with no side effects. */
1904
1905 static int
1906 safe_hash (x, mode)
1907 rtx x;
1908 enum machine_mode mode;
1909 {
1910 int save_do_not_record = do_not_record;
1911 int save_hash_arg_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
1912 int save_hash_arg_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
1913 int hash = canon_hash (x, mode);
1914 hash_arg_in_memory = save_hash_arg_in_memory;
1915 hash_arg_in_struct = save_hash_arg_in_struct;
1916 do_not_record = save_do_not_record;
1917 return hash;
1918 }
1919 \f
1920 /* Return 1 iff X and Y would canonicalize into the same thing,
1921 without actually constructing the canonicalization of either one.
1922 If VALIDATE is nonzero,
1923 we assume X is an expression being processed from the rtl
1924 and Y was found in the hash table. We check register refs
1925 in Y for being marked as valid.
1926
1927 If EQUAL_VALUES is nonzero, we allow a register to match a constant value
1928 that is known to be in the register. Ordinarily, we don't allow them
1929 to match, because letting them match would cause unpredictable results
1930 in all the places that search a hash table chain for an equivalent
1931 for a given value. A possible equivalent that has different structure
1932 has its hash code computed from different data. Whether the hash code
1933 is the same as that of the the given value is pure luck. */
1934
1935 static int
1936 exp_equiv_p (x, y, validate, equal_values)
1937 rtx x, y;
1938 int validate;
1939 int equal_values;
1940 {
1941 register int i;
1942 register enum rtx_code code;
1943 register char *fmt;
1944
1945 /* Note: it is incorrect to assume an expression is equivalent to itself
1946 if VALIDATE is nonzero. */
1947 if (x == y && !validate)
1948 return 1;
1949 if (x == 0 || y == 0)
1950 return x == y;
1951
1952 code = GET_CODE (x);
1953 if (code != GET_CODE (y))
1954 {
1955 if (!equal_values)
1956 return 0;
1957
1958 /* If X is a constant and Y is a register or vice versa, they may be
1959 equivalent. We only have to validate if Y is a register. */
1960 if (CONSTANT_P (x) && GET_CODE (y) == REG
1961 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (y))
1962 && GET_MODE (y) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (y)]]
1963 && rtx_equal_p (x, qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (y)]])
1964 && (! validate || reg_in_table[REGNO (y)] == reg_tick[REGNO (y)]))
1965 return 1;
1966
1967 if (CONSTANT_P (y) && code == REG
1968 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x))
1969 && GET_MODE (x) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]
1970 && rtx_equal_p (y, qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]))
1971 return 1;
1972
1973 return 0;
1974 }
1975
1976 /* (MULT:SI x y) and (MULT:HI x y) are NOT equivalent. */
1977 if (GET_MODE (x) != GET_MODE (y))
1978 return 0;
1979
1980 switch (code)
1981 {
1982 case PC:
1983 case CC0:
1984 return x == y;
1985
1986 case CONST_INT:
1987 return XINT (x, 0) == XINT (y, 0);
1988
1989 case LABEL_REF:
1990 case SYMBOL_REF:
1991 return XEXP (x, 0) == XEXP (y, 0);
1992
1993 case REG:
1994 {
1995 int regno = REGNO (y);
1996 int endregno
1997 = regno + (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? 1
1998 : HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (y)));
1999 int i;
2000
2001 /* If the quantities are not the same, the expressions are not
2002 equivalent. If there are and we are not to validate, they
2003 are equivalent. Otherwise, ensure all regs are up-to-date. */
2004
2005 if (reg_qty[REGNO (x)] != reg_qty[regno])
2006 return 0;
2007
2008 if (! validate)
2009 return 1;
2010
2011 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
2012 if (reg_in_table[i] != reg_tick[i])
2013 return 0;
2014
2015 return 1;
2016 }
2017
2018 /* For commutative operations, check both orders. */
2019 case PLUS:
2020 case MULT:
2021 case AND:
2022 case IOR:
2023 case XOR:
2024 case NE:
2025 case EQ:
2026 return ((exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (y, 0), validate, equal_values)
2027 && exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (y, 1),
2028 validate, equal_values))
2029 || (exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (y, 1),
2030 validate, equal_values)
2031 && exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (y, 0),
2032 validate, equal_values)));
2033 }
2034
2035 /* Compare the elements. If any pair of corresponding elements
2036 fail to match, return 0 for the whole things. */
2037
2038 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2039 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2040 {
2041 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
2042 {
2043 if (! exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, i), XEXP (y, i), validate, equal_values))
2044 return 0;
2045 }
2046 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
2047 {
2048 int j;
2049 if (XVECLEN (x, i) != XVECLEN (y, i))
2050 return 0;
2051 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2052 if (! exp_equiv_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), XVECEXP (y, i, j),
2053 validate, equal_values))
2054 return 0;
2055 }
2056 else if (fmt[i] == 's')
2057 {
2058 if (strcmp (XSTR (x, i), XSTR (y, i)))
2059 return 0;
2060 }
2061 else if (fmt[i] == 'i')
2062 {
2063 if (XINT (x, i) != XINT (y, i))
2064 return 0;
2065 }
2066 else if (fmt[i] != '0')
2067 abort ();
2068 }
2069 return 1;
2070 }
2071 \f
2072 /* Return 1 iff any subexpression of X matches Y.
2073 Here we do not require that X or Y be valid (for registers referred to)
2074 for being in the hash table. */
2075
2076 int
2077 refers_to_p (x, y)
2078 rtx x, y;
2079 {
2080 register int i;
2081 register enum rtx_code code;
2082 register char *fmt;
2083
2084 repeat:
2085 if (x == y)
2086 return 1;
2087 if (x == 0 || y == 0)
2088 return 0;
2089
2090 code = GET_CODE (x);
2091 /* If X as a whole has the same code as Y, they may match.
2092 If so, return 1. */
2093 if (code == GET_CODE (y))
2094 {
2095 if (exp_equiv_p (x, y, 0, 1))
2096 return 1;
2097 }
2098
2099 /* X does not match, so try its subexpressions. */
2100
2101 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2102 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2103 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
2104 {
2105 if (i == 0)
2106 {
2107 x = XEXP (x, 0);
2108 goto repeat;
2109 }
2110 else
2111 if (refers_to_p (XEXP (x, i), y))
2112 return 1;
2113 }
2114 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
2115 {
2116 int j;
2117 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2118 if (refers_to_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), y))
2119 return 1;
2120 }
2121
2122 return 0;
2123 }
2124 \f
2125 /* Return 1 iff any subexpression of X refers to memory
2126 at an address of BASE plus some offset
2127 such that any of the bytes' offsets fall between START (inclusive)
2128 and END (exclusive).
2129
2130 The value is undefined if X is a varying address.
2131 This function is not used in such cases.
2132
2133 When used in the cse pass, `qty_const' is nonzero, and it is used
2134 to treat an address that is a register with a known constant value
2135 as if it were that constant value.
2136 In the loop pass, `qty_const' is zero, so this is not done. */
2137
2138 int
2139 refers_to_mem_p (x, base, start, end)
2140 rtx x, base;
2141 int start, end;
2142 {
2143 register int i;
2144 register enum rtx_code code;
2145 register char *fmt;
2146
2147 if (GET_CODE (base) == CONST_INT)
2148 {
2149 start += INTVAL (base);
2150 end += INTVAL (base);
2151 base = const0_rtx;
2152 }
2153
2154 repeat:
2155 if (x == 0)
2156 return 0;
2157
2158 code = GET_CODE (x);
2159 if (code == MEM)
2160 {
2161 register rtx addr = XEXP (x, 0); /* Get the address. */
2162 int myend;
2163
2164 i = 0;
2165 if (GET_CODE (addr) == REG
2166 /* qty_const is 0 when outside the cse pass;
2167 at such times, this info is not available. */
2168 && qty_const != 0
2169 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (addr))
2170 && GET_MODE (addr) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]]
2171 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]] != 0)
2172 addr = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]];
2173 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS
2174 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == CONST_INT
2175 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == REG
2176 && qty_const != 0
2177 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0)))
2178 && (GET_MODE (XEXP (addr, 0))
2179 == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0))]])
2180 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0))]])
2181 {
2182 i = INTVAL (XEXP (addr, 1));
2183 addr = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0))]];
2184 }
2185
2186 check_addr:
2187 if (GET_CODE (addr) == CONST)
2188 addr = XEXP (addr, 0);
2189
2190 /* If ADDR is BASE, or BASE plus an integer, put
2191 the integer in I. */
2192 if (GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS
2193 && XEXP (addr, 0) == base
2194 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == CONST_INT)
2195 i += INTVAL (XEXP (addr, 1));
2196 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == LO_SUM)
2197 {
2198 if (GET_CODE (base) != LO_SUM)
2199 return 1;
2200 /* The REG component of the LO_SUM is known by the
2201 const value in the XEXP part. */
2202 addr = XEXP (addr, 1);
2203 base = XEXP (base, 1);
2204 i = 0;
2205 if (GET_CODE (base) == CONST)
2206 base = XEXP (base, 0);
2207 if (GET_CODE (base) == PLUS
2208 && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT)
2209 {
2210 int tem = INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1));
2211 start += tem;
2212 end += tem;
2213 base = XEXP (base, 0);
2214 }
2215 goto check_addr;
2216 }
2217 else if (GET_CODE (base) == LO_SUM)
2218 {
2219 base = XEXP (base, 1);
2220 if (GET_CODE (base) == CONST)
2221 base = XEXP (base, 0);
2222 if (GET_CODE (base) == PLUS
2223 && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT)
2224 {
2225 int tem = INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1));
2226 start += tem;
2227 end += tem;
2228 base = XEXP (base, 0);
2229 }
2230 goto check_addr;
2231 }
2232 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == CONST_INT && base == const0_rtx)
2233 i = INTVAL (addr);
2234 else if (addr != base)
2235 return 0;
2236
2237 myend = i + GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x));
2238 return myend > start && i < end;
2239 }
2240
2241 /* X does not match, so try its subexpressions. */
2242
2243 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2244 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2245 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
2246 {
2247 if (i == 0)
2248 {
2249 x = XEXP (x, 0);
2250 goto repeat;
2251 }
2252 else
2253 if (refers_to_mem_p (XEXP (x, i), base, start, end))
2254 return 1;
2255 }
2256 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
2257 {
2258 int j;
2259 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2260 if (refers_to_mem_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), base, start, end))
2261 return 1;
2262 }
2263
2264 return 0;
2265 }
2266
2267 /* Nonzero if X refers to memory at a varying address;
2268 except that a register which has at the moment a known constant value
2269 isn't considered variable. */
2270
2271 static int
2272 cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (x)
2273 rtx x;
2274 {
2275 /* We need not check for X and the equivalence class being of the same
2276 mode because if X is equivalent to a constant in some mode, it
2277 doesn't vary in any mode. */
2278
2279 if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM
2280 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == REG
2281 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 0)))
2282 && GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))]]
2283 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))]] != 0)
2284 return 0;
2285
2286 if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM
2287 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS
2288 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT
2289 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == REG
2290 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)))
2291 && (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))
2292 == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))]])
2293 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))]])
2294 return 0;
2295
2296 return rtx_addr_varies_p (x);
2297 }
2298 \f
2299 /* Canonicalize an expression:
2300 replace each register reference inside it
2301 with the "oldest" equivalent register.
2302
2303 If INSN is non-zero and we are replacing a pseudo with a hard register
2304 or vice versa, verify that INSN remains valid after we make our
2305 substitution. */
2306
2307 static rtx
2308 canon_reg (x, insn)
2309 rtx x;
2310 rtx insn;
2311 {
2312 register int i;
2313 register enum rtx_code code;
2314 register char *fmt;
2315
2316 if (x == 0)
2317 return x;
2318
2319 code = GET_CODE (x);
2320 switch (code)
2321 {
2322 case PC:
2323 case CC0:
2324 case CONST:
2325 case CONST_INT:
2326 case CONST_DOUBLE:
2327 case SYMBOL_REF:
2328 case LABEL_REF:
2329 case ADDR_VEC:
2330 case ADDR_DIFF_VEC:
2331 return x;
2332
2333 case REG:
2334 {
2335 register int first;
2336
2337 /* Never replace a hard reg, because hard regs can appear
2338 in more than one machine mode, and we must preserve the mode
2339 of each occurrence. Also, some hard regs appear in
2340 MEMs that are shared and mustn't be altered. Don't try to
2341 replace any reg that maps to a reg of class NO_REGS. */
2342 if (REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2343 || ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)))
2344 return x;
2345
2346 first = qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]];
2347 return (first >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? regno_reg_rtx[first]
2348 : REGNO_REG_CLASS (first) == NO_REGS ? x
2349 : gen_rtx (REG, qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]], first));
2350 }
2351 }
2352
2353 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2354 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2355 {
2356 register int j;
2357
2358 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
2359 {
2360 rtx new = canon_reg (XEXP (x, i), insn);
2361
2362 /* If replacing pseudo with hard reg or vice versa, ensure the
2363 insn remains valid. Likewise if the insn has MATCH_DUPs. */
2364 if (new && GET_CODE (new) == REG && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, i)) == REG
2365 && (((REGNO (new) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
2366 != (REGNO (XEXP (x, i)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
2367 || (insn != 0 && insn_n_dups[recog_memoized (insn)] > 0)))
2368 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, i), new, 0);
2369 else
2370 XEXP (x, i) = new;
2371 }
2372 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
2373 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2374 XVECEXP (x, i, j) = canon_reg (XVECEXP (x, i, j), insn);
2375 }
2376
2377 return x;
2378 }
2379 \f
2380 /* LOC is a location with INSN that is an operand address (the contents of
2381 a MEM). Find the best equivalent address to use that is valid for this
2382 insn.
2383
2384 On most CISC machines, complicated address modes are costly, and rtx_cost
2385 is a good approximation for that cost. However, most RISC machines have
2386 only a few (usually only one) memory reference formats. If an address is
2387 valid at all, it is often just as cheap as any other address. Hence, for
2388 RISC machines, we use the configuration macro `ADDRESS_COST' to compare the
2389 costs of various addresses. For two addresses of equal cost, choose the one
2390 with the highest `rtx_cost' value as that has the potential of eliminating
2391 the most insns. For equal costs, we choose the first in the equivalence
2392 class. Note that we ignore the fact that pseudo registers are cheaper
2393 than hard registers here because we would also prefer the pseudo registers.
2394 */
2395
2396 void
2397 find_best_addr (insn, loc)
2398 rtx insn;
2399 rtx *loc;
2400 {
2401 struct table_elt *elt, *p;
2402 rtx addr = *loc;
2403 int our_cost;
2404 int found_better = 1;
2405 int save_do_not_record = do_not_record;
2406 int save_hash_arg_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
2407 int save_hash_arg_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
2408 int hash_code;
2409 int addr_volatile;
2410 int regno;
2411
2412 /* Do not try to replace constant addresses or addresses of local and
2413 argument slots. These MEM expressions are made only once and inserted
2414 in many instructions, as well as being used to control symbol table
2415 output. It is not safe to clobber them.
2416
2417 There are some uncommon cases where the address is already in a register
2418 for some reason, but we cannot take advantage of that because we have
2419 no easy way to unshare the MEM. In addition, looking up all stack
2420 addresses is costly. */
2421 if ((GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS
2422 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == REG
2423 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == CONST_INT
2424 && (regno = REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0)),
2425 regno == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || regno == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM))
2426 || (GET_CODE (addr) == REG
2427 && (regno = REGNO (addr),
2428 regno == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || regno == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM))
2429 || CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (addr))
2430 return;
2431
2432 /* If this address is not simply a register, try to fold it. This will
2433 sometimes simplify the expression. Many simplifications
2434 will not be valid, but some, usually applying the associative rule, will
2435 be valid and produce better code. */
2436 if (GET_CODE (addr) != REG
2437 && validate_change (insn, loc, fold_rtx (addr, insn), 0))
2438 addr = *loc;
2439
2440 /* If this address is not in the hash table, we can't do any better.
2441 Also, ignore if volatile. */
2442 do_not_record = 0;
2443 hash_code = HASH (addr, Pmode);
2444 addr_volatile = do_not_record;
2445 do_not_record = save_do_not_record;
2446 hash_arg_in_memory = save_hash_arg_in_memory;
2447 hash_arg_in_struct = save_hash_arg_in_struct;
2448
2449 if (addr_volatile)
2450 return;
2451
2452 elt = lookup (addr, hash_code, Pmode);
2453
2454 if (elt == 0)
2455 return;
2456
2457 #ifndef ADDRESS_COST
2458 our_cost = elt->cost;
2459
2460 /* Find the lowest cost below ours that works. */
2461 for (elt = elt->first_same_value; elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
2462 if (elt->cost < our_cost
2463 && (GET_CODE (elt->exp) == REG || exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
2464 && validate_change (insn, loc, canon_reg (copy_rtx (elt->exp), 0), 0))
2465 return;
2466
2467 #else
2468
2469 /* We need to find the best (under the criteria documented above) entry in
2470 the class that is valid. We use the `flag' field to indicate choices
2471 that were invalid and iterate until we can't find a better one that
2472 hasn't already been tried. */
2473
2474 for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
2475 p->flag = 0;
2476
2477 while (found_better)
2478 {
2479 int best_addr_cost = ADDRESS_COST (*loc);
2480 int best_rtx_cost = (elt->cost + 1) >> 1;
2481 struct table_elt *best_elt = elt;
2482
2483 found_better = 0;
2484 for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
2485 if (! p->flag
2486 && (GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG || exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
2487 && (ADDRESS_COST (p->exp) < best_addr_cost
2488 || (ADDRESS_COST (p->exp) == best_addr_cost
2489 && (p->cost + 1) >> 1 > best_rtx_cost)))
2490 {
2491 found_better = 1;
2492 best_addr_cost = ADDRESS_COST (p->exp);
2493 best_rtx_cost = (p->cost + 1) >> 1;
2494 best_elt = p;
2495 }
2496
2497 if (found_better)
2498 {
2499 if (validate_change (insn, loc,
2500 canon_reg (copy_rtx (best_elt->exp), 0), 0))
2501 return;
2502 else
2503 best_elt->flag = 1;
2504 }
2505 }
2506 #endif
2507 }
2508 \f
2509 /* Given an operation (CODE, *PARG1, *PARG2), where code is a comparison
2510 operation (EQ, NE, GT, etc.), follow it back through the hash table and
2511 what values are being compared.
2512
2513 *PARG1 and *PARG2 are updated to contain the rtx representing the values
2514 actually being compared. For example, if *PARG1 was (cc0) and *PARG2
2515 was (const_int 0), *PARG1 and *PARG2 will be set to the objects that were
2516 compared to produce cc0.
2517
2518 The return value is the comparison operator and is either the code of
2519 A or the code corresponding to the inverse of the comparison. */
2520
2521 static enum rtx_code
2522 find_comparison_args (code, parg1, parg2)
2523 enum rtx_code code;
2524 rtx *parg1, *parg2;
2525 {
2526 rtx arg1, arg2;
2527
2528 arg1 = *parg1, arg2 = *parg2;
2529
2530 /* If ARG2 is const0_rtx, see what ARG1 is equivalent to. */
2531
2532 while (arg2 == const0_rtx)
2533 {
2534 /* Set non-zero when we find something of interest. */
2535 rtx x = 0;
2536 int reverse_code = 0;
2537 struct table_elt *p = 0;
2538
2539 /* If arg1 is a COMPARE, extract the comparison arguments from it.
2540 On machines with CC0, this is the only case that can occur, since
2541 fold_rtx will return the COMPARE or item being compared with zero
2542 when given CC0. */
2543
2544 if (GET_CODE (arg1) == COMPARE && arg2 == const0_rtx)
2545 x = arg1;
2546
2547 /* If ARG1 is a comparison operator and CODE is testing for
2548 STORE_FLAG_VALUE, get the inner arguments. */
2549
2550 else if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (arg1)) == '<')
2551 {
2552 if (code == NE || (code == LT && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1))
2553 x = arg1;
2554 else if (code == EQ || (code == GE && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1))
2555 x = arg1, reverse_code = 1;
2556 }
2557
2558 /* ??? We could also check for
2559
2560 (ne (and (eq (...) (const_int 1))) (const_int 0))
2561
2562 and related forms, but let's wait until we see them occurring. */
2563
2564 if (x == 0)
2565 /* Look up ARG1 in the hash table and see if it has an equivalence
2566 that lets us see what is being compared. */
2567 p = lookup (arg1, safe_hash (arg1, GET_MODE (arg1)) % NBUCKETS,
2568 GET_MODE (arg1));
2569 if (p) p = p->first_same_value;
2570
2571 for (; p; p = p->next_same_value)
2572 {
2573 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (p->exp);
2574
2575 /* If the entry isn't valid, skip it. */
2576 if (! exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
2577 continue;
2578
2579 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == COMPARE
2580 /* Another possibility is that this machine has a compare insn
2581 that includes the comparison code. In that case, ARG1 would
2582 be equivalent to a comparison operation that would set ARG1 to
2583 either STORE_FLAG_VALUE or zero. If this is an NE operation,
2584 ORIG_CODE is the actual comparison being done; if it is an EQ,
2585 we must reverse ORIG_CODE. On machine with a negative value
2586 for STORE_FLAG_VALUE, also look at LT and GE operations. */
2587 || ((code == NE
2588 || (code == LT
2589 && inner_mode != VOIDmode
2590 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT
2591 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2592 & (1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode) - 1)))))
2593 && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (p->exp)) == '<'))
2594 {
2595 x = p->exp;
2596 break;
2597 }
2598 else if ((code == EQ
2599 || (code == GE
2600 && inner_mode != VOIDmode
2601 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT
2602 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2603 & (1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode) - 1)))))
2604 && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (p->exp)) == '<')
2605 {
2606 reverse_code = 1;
2607 x = p->exp;
2608 break;
2609 }
2610
2611 /* If this is fp + constant, the equivalent is a better operand since
2612 it may let us predict the value of the comparison. */
2613 else if (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (p->exp))
2614 {
2615 arg1 = p->exp;
2616 continue;
2617 }
2618 }
2619
2620 /* If we didn't find a useful equivalence for ARG1, we are done.
2621 Otherwise, set up for the next iteration. */
2622 if (x == 0)
2623 break;
2624
2625 arg1 = XEXP (x, 0), arg2 = XEXP (x, 1);
2626 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x)) == '<')
2627 code = GET_CODE (x);
2628
2629 if (reverse_code)
2630 code = reverse_condition (code);
2631 }
2632
2633 /* Return our results. */
2634 *parg1 = fold_rtx (arg1, 0), *parg2 = fold_rtx (arg2, 0);
2635
2636 return code;
2637 }
2638 \f
2639 /* Try to simplify a unary operation CODE whose output mode is to be
2640 MODE with input operand OP whose mode was originally OP_MODE.
2641 Return zero if no simplification can be made. */
2642
2643 rtx
2644 simplify_unary_operation (code, mode, op, op_mode)
2645 enum rtx_code code;
2646 enum machine_mode mode;
2647 rtx op;
2648 enum machine_mode op_mode;
2649 {
2650 register int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
2651
2652 /* The order of these tests is critical so that, for example, we don't
2653 check the wrong mode (input vs. output) for a conversion operation,
2654 such as FIX. At some point, this should be simplified. */
2655
2656 #if !defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
2657 if (code == FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT)
2658 {
2659 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
2660
2661 #ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
2662 REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (d, INTVAL (op), INTVAL (op) < 0 ? ~0 : 0);
2663 #else
2664 d = (double) INTVAL (op);
2665 #endif
2666 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
2667 }
2668 else if (code == UNSIGNED_FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT)
2669 {
2670 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
2671
2672 #ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
2673 REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (d, INTVAL (op), 0);
2674 #else
2675 d = (double) (unsigned int) INTVAL (op);
2676 #endif
2677 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
2678 }
2679
2680 else if (code == FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
2681 && GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
2682 {
2683 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
2684
2685 #ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
2686 REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (d, CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op), CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op));
2687 #else
2688 if (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) < 0)
2689 {
2690 d = (double) (~ CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op));
2691 d *= ((double) (1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_INT / 2))
2692 * (double) (1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_INT / 2)));
2693 d += (double) (unsigned) (~ CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op));
2694 d = (- d - 1.0);
2695 }
2696 else
2697 {
2698 d = (double) CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op);
2699 d *= ((double) (1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_INT / 2))
2700 * (double) (1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_INT / 2)));
2701 d += (double) (unsigned) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op);
2702 }
2703 #endif /* REAL_ARITHMETIC */
2704 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
2705 }
2706 else if (code == UNSIGNED_FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
2707 && GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
2708 {
2709 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
2710
2711 #ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
2712 REAL_VALUE_FROM_UNSIGNED_INT (d, CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op),
2713 CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op));
2714 #else
2715 d = (double) CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op);
2716 d *= ((double) (1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_INT / 2))
2717 * (double) (1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_INT / 2)));
2718 d += (double) (unsigned) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op);
2719 #endif /* REAL_ARITHMETIC */
2720 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
2721 }
2722 #endif
2723
2724 else if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
2725 && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT && width > 0)
2726 {
2727 register int arg0 = INTVAL (op);
2728 register int val;
2729
2730 switch (code)
2731 {
2732 case NOT:
2733 val = ~ arg0;
2734 break;
2735
2736 case NEG:
2737 val = - arg0;
2738 break;
2739
2740 case ABS:
2741 val = (arg0 >= 0 ? arg0 : - arg0);
2742 break;
2743
2744 case FFS:
2745 /* Don't use ffs here. Instead, get low order bit and then its
2746 number. If arg0 is zero, this will return 0, as desired. */
2747 arg0 &= GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
2748 val = exact_log2 (arg0 & (- arg0)) + 1;
2749 break;
2750
2751 case TRUNCATE:
2752 val = arg0;
2753 break;
2754
2755 case ZERO_EXTEND:
2756 if (op_mode == VOIDmode)
2757 op_mode = mode;
2758 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) == HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
2759 val = arg0;
2760 else if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) < HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
2761 val = arg0 & ~((-1) << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode));
2762 else
2763 return 0;
2764 break;
2765
2766 case SIGN_EXTEND:
2767 if (op_mode == VOIDmode)
2768 op_mode = mode;
2769 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) == HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
2770 val = arg0;
2771 else if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) < HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
2772 {
2773 val = arg0 & ~((-1) << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode));
2774 if (val & (1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) - 1)))
2775 val -= 1 << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode);
2776 }
2777 else
2778 return 0;
2779 break;
2780
2781 case SQRT:
2782 return 0;
2783
2784 default:
2785 abort ();
2786 }
2787
2788 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode,
2789 unless they and our sign bit are all one.
2790 So we get either a reasonable negative value or a reasonable
2791 unsigned value for this mode. */
2792 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
2793 && ((val & ((-1) << (width - 1))) != ((-1) << (width - 1))))
2794 val &= (1 << width) - 1;
2795
2796 return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, val);
2797 }
2798
2799 /* We can do some operations on integer CONST_DOUBLEs. Also allow
2800 for a DImode operation on a CONST_INT. */
2801 else if (GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode
2802 && (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE || GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT))
2803 {
2804 int l1, h1, lv, hv;
2805
2806 if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE)
2807 l1 = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op), h1 = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op);
2808 else
2809 l1 = INTVAL (op), h1 = l1 < 0 ? -1 : 0;
2810
2811 switch (code)
2812 {
2813 case NOT:
2814 lv = ~ l1;
2815 hv = ~ h1;
2816 break;
2817
2818 case NEG:
2819 neg_double (l1, h1, &lv, &hv);
2820 break;
2821
2822 case ABS:
2823 if (h1 < 0)
2824 neg_double (l1, h1, &lv, &hv);
2825 else
2826 lv = l1, hv = h1;
2827 break;
2828
2829 case FFS:
2830 hv = 0;
2831 if (l1 == 0)
2832 lv = HOST_BITS_PER_INT + exact_log2 (h1 & (-h1)) + 1;
2833 else
2834 lv = exact_log2 (l1 & (-l1)) + 1;
2835 break;
2836
2837 case TRUNCATE:
2838 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
2839 return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, l1 & GET_MODE_MASK (mode));
2840 else
2841 return 0;
2842 break;
2843
2844 case SQRT:
2845 return 0;
2846
2847 default:
2848 return 0;
2849 }
2850
2851 return immed_double_const (lv, hv, mode);
2852 }
2853
2854 #if ! defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
2855 else if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
2856 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT)
2857 {
2858 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
2859 jmp_buf handler;
2860 rtx x;
2861
2862 if (setjmp (handler))
2863 /* There used to be a warning here, but that is inadvisable.
2864 People may want to cause traps, and the natural way
2865 to do it should not get a warning. */
2866 return 0;
2867
2868 set_float_handler (handler);
2869
2870 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op);
2871
2872 switch (code)
2873 {
2874 case NEG:
2875 d = REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (d);
2876 break;
2877
2878 case ABS:
2879 if (REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (d))
2880 d = REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (d);
2881 break;
2882
2883 case FLOAT_TRUNCATE:
2884 d = (double) REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE (mode, d);
2885 break;
2886
2887 case FLOAT_EXTEND:
2888 /* All this does is change the mode. */
2889 break;
2890
2891 case FIX:
2892 d = (double) REAL_VALUE_FIX_TRUNCATE (d);
2893 break;
2894
2895 case UNSIGNED_FIX:
2896 d = (double) REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX_TRUNCATE (d);
2897 break;
2898
2899 case SQRT:
2900 return 0;
2901
2902 default:
2903 abort ();
2904 }
2905
2906 x = immed_real_const_1 (d, mode);
2907 set_float_handler (0);
2908 return x;
2909 }
2910 else if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
2911 && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT && width > 0)
2912 {
2913 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
2914 jmp_buf handler;
2915 rtx x;
2916 int val;
2917
2918 if (setjmp (handler))
2919 return 0;
2920
2921 set_float_handler (handler);
2922
2923 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op);
2924
2925 switch (code)
2926 {
2927 case FIX:
2928 val = REAL_VALUE_FIX (d);
2929 break;
2930
2931 case UNSIGNED_FIX:
2932 val = REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (d);
2933 break;
2934
2935 default:
2936 abort ();
2937 }
2938
2939 set_float_handler (0);
2940
2941 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode,
2942 unless they and our sign bit are all one.
2943 So we get either a reasonable negative value or a reasonable
2944 unsigned value for this mode. */
2945 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
2946 && ((val & ((-1) << (width - 1))) != ((-1) << (width - 1))))
2947 val &= (1 << width) - 1;
2948
2949 return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, val);
2950 }
2951 #endif
2952 /* This was formerly used only for non-IEEE float.
2953 eggert@twinsun.com says it is safe for IEEE also. */
2954 else
2955 {
2956 /* There are some simplifications we can do even if the operands
2957 aren't constant. */
2958 switch (code)
2959 {
2960 case NEG:
2961 case NOT:
2962 /* (not (not X)) == X, similarly for NEG. */
2963 if (GET_CODE (op) == code)
2964 return XEXP (op, 0);
2965 break;
2966
2967 case SIGN_EXTEND:
2968 /* (sign_extend (truncate (minus (label_ref L1) (label_ref L2))))
2969 becomes just the MINUS if its mode is MODE. This allows
2970 folding switch statements on machines using casesi (such as
2971 the Vax). */
2972 if (GET_CODE (op) == TRUNCATE
2973 && GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == mode
2974 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == MINUS
2975 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op, 0), 0)) == LABEL_REF
2976 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op, 0), 1)) == LABEL_REF)
2977 return XEXP (op, 0);
2978 break;
2979 }
2980
2981 return 0;
2982 }
2983 }
2984 \f
2985 /* Simplify a binary operation CODE with result mode MODE, operating on OP0
2986 and OP1. Return 0 if no simplification is possible.
2987
2988 Don't use this for relational operations such as EQ or LT.
2989 Use simplify_relational_operation instead. */
2990
2991 rtx
2992 simplify_binary_operation (code, mode, op0, op1)
2993 enum rtx_code code;
2994 enum machine_mode mode;
2995 rtx op0, op1;
2996 {
2997 register int arg0, arg1, arg0s, arg1s;
2998 int val;
2999 int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
3000
3001 /* Relational operations don't work here. We must know the mode
3002 of the operands in order to do the comparison correctly.
3003 Assuming a full word can give incorrect results.
3004 Consider comparing 128 with -128 in QImode. */
3005
3006 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == '<')
3007 abort ();
3008
3009 #if ! defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
3010 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT
3011 && GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
3012 && mode == GET_MODE (op0) && mode == GET_MODE (op1))
3013 {
3014 REAL_VALUE_TYPE f0, f1, value;
3015 jmp_buf handler;
3016
3017 if (setjmp (handler))
3018 return 0;
3019
3020 set_float_handler (handler);
3021
3022 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (f0, op0);
3023 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (f1, op1);
3024 f0 = REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE (mode, f0);
3025 f1 = REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE (mode, f1);
3026
3027 #ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
3028 REAL_ARITHMETIC (value, code, f0, f1);
3029 #else
3030 switch (code)
3031 {
3032 case PLUS:
3033 value = f0 + f1;
3034 break;
3035 case MINUS:
3036 value = f0 - f1;
3037 break;
3038 case MULT:
3039 value = f0 * f1;
3040 break;
3041 case DIV:
3042 #ifndef REAL_INFINITY
3043 if (f1 == 0)
3044 abort ();
3045 #endif
3046 value = f0 / f1;
3047 break;
3048 case SMIN:
3049 value = MIN (f0, f1);
3050 break;
3051 case SMAX:
3052 value = MAX (f0, f1);
3053 break;
3054 default:
3055 abort ();
3056 }
3057 #endif
3058
3059 set_float_handler (0);
3060 value = REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE (mode, value);
3061 return immed_real_const_1 (value, mode);
3062 }
3063
3064 /* We can fold some multi-word operations. */
3065 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
3066 && GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE
3067 && (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE || GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT))
3068 {
3069 int l1, l2, h1, h2, lv, hv;
3070
3071 l1 = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op0), h1 = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op0);
3072
3073 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE)
3074 l2 = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op1), h2 = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op1);
3075 else
3076 l2 = INTVAL (op1), h2 = l2 < 0 ? -1 : 0;
3077
3078 switch (code)
3079 {
3080 case MINUS:
3081 /* A - B == A + (-B). */
3082 neg_double (l2, h2, &lv, &hv);
3083 l2 = lv, h2 = hv;
3084
3085 /* .. fall through ... */
3086
3087 case PLUS:
3088 add_double (l1, h1, l2, h2, &lv, &hv);
3089 break;
3090
3091 case MULT:
3092 mul_double (l1, h1, l2, h2, &lv, &hv);
3093 break;
3094
3095 case DIV: case MOD: case UDIV: case UMOD:
3096 /* We'd need to include tree.h to do this and it doesn't seem worth
3097 it. */
3098 return 0;
3099
3100 case AND:
3101 lv = l1 & l2, hv = h1 & h2;
3102 break;
3103
3104 case IOR:
3105 lv = l1 | l2, hv = h1 | h2;
3106 break;
3107
3108 case XOR:
3109 lv = l1 ^ l2, hv = h1 ^ h2;
3110 break;
3111
3112 case SMIN:
3113 if (h1 < h2 || (h1 == h2 && (unsigned) l1 < (unsigned) l2))
3114 lv = l1, hv = h1;
3115 else
3116 lv = l2, hv = h2;
3117 break;
3118
3119 case SMAX:
3120 if (h1 > h2 || (h1 == h2 && (unsigned) l1 > (unsigned) l2))
3121 lv = l1, hv = h1;
3122 else
3123 lv = l2, hv = h2;
3124 break;
3125
3126 case UMIN:
3127 if ((unsigned) h1 < (unsigned) h2
3128 || (h1 == h2 && (unsigned) l1 < (unsigned) l2))
3129 lv = l1, hv = h1;
3130 else
3131 lv = l2, hv = h2;
3132 break;
3133
3134 case UMAX:
3135 if ((unsigned) h1 > (unsigned) h2
3136 || (h1 == h2 && (unsigned) l1 > (unsigned) l2))
3137 lv = l1, hv = h1;
3138 else
3139 lv = l2, hv = h2;
3140 break;
3141
3142 case LSHIFTRT: case ASHIFTRT:
3143 case ASHIFT: case LSHIFT:
3144 case ROTATE: case ROTATERT:
3145 #ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
3146 l2 &= (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - 1), h2 = 0;
3147 #endif
3148
3149 if (h2 != 0 || l2 < 0 || l2 >= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode))
3150 return 0;
3151
3152 if (code == LSHIFTRT || code == ASHIFTRT)
3153 rshift_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv,
3154 code == ASHIFTRT);
3155 else if (code == ASHIFT || code == LSHIFT)
3156 lshift_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv,
3157 code == ASHIFT);
3158 else if (code == ROTATE)
3159 lrotate_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv);
3160 else /* code == ROTATERT */
3161 rrotate_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv);
3162 break;
3163
3164 default:
3165 return 0;
3166 }
3167
3168 return immed_double_const (lv, hv, mode);
3169 }
3170 #endif /* not REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE, or REAL_ARITHMETIC */
3171
3172 if (GET_CODE (op0) != CONST_INT || GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_INT
3173 || width > HOST_BITS_PER_INT || width == 0)
3174 {
3175 /* Even if we can't compute a constant result,
3176 there are some cases worth simplifying. */
3177
3178 switch (code)
3179 {
3180 case PLUS:
3181 /* In IEEE floating point, x+0 is not the same as x. Similarly
3182 for the other optimizations below. */
3183 if (TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT == IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
3184 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
3185 break;
3186
3187 if (op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
3188 return op0;
3189
3190 /* Strip off any surrounding CONSTs. They don't matter in any of
3191 the cases below. */
3192 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST)
3193 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
3194 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST)
3195 op1 = XEXP (op1, 0);
3196
3197 /* ((-a) + b) -> (b - a) and similarly for (a + (-b)) */
3198 if (GET_CODE (op0) == NEG)
3199 {
3200 rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode,
3201 op1, XEXP (op0, 0));
3202 return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (MINUS, mode, op1, XEXP (op0, 0));
3203 }
3204 else if (GET_CODE (op1) == NEG)
3205 {
3206 rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode,
3207 op0, XEXP (op1, 0));
3208 return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (MINUS, mode, op0, XEXP (op1, 0));
3209 }
3210
3211 /* Don't use the associative law for floating point.
3212 The inaccuracy makes it nonassociative,
3213 and subtle programs can break if operations are associated. */
3214 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
3215 break;
3216
3217 /* (a - b) + b -> a, similarly a + (b - a) -> a */
3218 if (GET_CODE (op0) == MINUS
3219 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 1), op1) && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3220 return XEXP (op0, 0);
3221
3222 if (GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS
3223 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 1), op0) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3224 return XEXP (op1, 0);
3225
3226 /* (c1 - a) + c2 becomes (c1 + c2) - a. */
3227 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT && GET_CODE (op0) == MINUS
3228 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == CONST_INT)
3229 {
3230 rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (PLUS, mode, op1,
3231 XEXP (op0, 0));
3232
3233 return tem ? gen_rtx (MINUS, mode, tem, XEXP (op0, 1)) : 0;
3234 }
3235
3236 /* Handle both-operands-constant cases. */
3237 if (CONSTANT_P (op0) && CONSTANT_P (op1)
3238 && GET_CODE (op0) != CONST_DOUBLE
3239 && GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_DOUBLE
3240 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
3241 {
3242 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
3243 return plus_constant (op0, INTVAL (op1));
3244 else if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT)
3245 return plus_constant (op1, INTVAL (op0));
3246 else
3247 return gen_rtx (CONST, mode,
3248 gen_rtx (PLUS, mode,
3249 GET_CODE (op0) == CONST
3250 ? XEXP (op0, 0) : op0,
3251 GET_CODE (op1) == CONST
3252 ? XEXP (op1, 0) : op1));
3253 }
3254 else if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3255 && GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS
3256 && (CONSTANT_P (XEXP (op0, 0))
3257 || CONSTANT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))))
3258 /* constant + (variable + constant)
3259 can result if an index register is made constant.
3260 We simplify this by adding the constants.
3261 If we did not, it would become an invalid address. */
3262 return plus_constant (op0, INTVAL (op1));
3263 break;
3264
3265 case COMPARE:
3266 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
3267 /* Convert (compare FOO (const_int 0)) to FOO unless we aren't
3268 using cc0, in which case we want to leave it as a COMPARE
3269 so we can distinguish it from a register-register-copy.
3270
3271 In IEEE floating point, x-0 is not the same as x. */
3272
3273 if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
3274 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
3275 && op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
3276 return op0;
3277 #else
3278 /* Do nothing here. */
3279 #endif
3280 break;
3281
3282 case MINUS:
3283 /* None of these optimizations can be done for IEEE
3284 floating point. */
3285 if (TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT == IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
3286 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
3287 break;
3288
3289 /* We can't assume x-x is 0 even with non-IEEE floating point. */
3290 if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1)
3291 && ! side_effects_p (op0)
3292 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_FLOAT)
3293 return const0_rtx;
3294
3295 /* Change subtraction from zero into negation. */
3296 if (op0 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
3297 return gen_rtx (NEG, mode, op1);
3298
3299 /* Subtracting 0 has no effect. */
3300 if (op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
3301 return op0;
3302
3303 /* Strip off any surrounding CONSTs. They don't matter in any of
3304 the cases below. */
3305 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST)
3306 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
3307 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST)
3308 op1 = XEXP (op1, 0);
3309
3310 /* (a - (-b)) -> (a + b). */
3311 if (GET_CODE (op1) == NEG)
3312 {
3313 rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (PLUS, mode,
3314 op0, XEXP (op1, 0));
3315 return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (PLUS, mode, op0, XEXP (op1, 0));
3316 }
3317
3318 /* Don't use the associative law for floating point.
3319 The inaccuracy makes it nonassociative,
3320 and subtle programs can break if operations are associated. */
3321 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
3322 break;
3323
3324 /* (a + b) - a -> b, and (b - (a + b)) -> -a */
3325 if (GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS
3326 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 0), op1)
3327 && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3328 return XEXP (op0, 1);
3329 else if (GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS
3330 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 1), op1)
3331 && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3332 return XEXP (op0, 0);
3333
3334 if (GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS
3335 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 0), op0)
3336 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3337 {
3338 rtx tem = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, XEXP (op1, 1),
3339 mode);
3340
3341 return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (NEG, mode, XEXP (op1, 1));
3342 }
3343 else if (GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS
3344 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 1), op0)
3345 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3346 {
3347 rtx tem = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, XEXP (op1, 0),
3348 mode);
3349
3350 return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (NEG, mode, XEXP (op1, 0));
3351 }
3352
3353 /* a - (a - b) -> b */
3354 if (GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS && rtx_equal_p (op0, XEXP (op1, 0))
3355 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3356 return XEXP (op1, 1);
3357
3358 /* (a +/- b) - (a +/- c) can be simplified. Do variants of
3359 this involving commutativity. The most common case is
3360 (a + C1) - (a + C2), but it's not hard to do all the cases. */
3361 if ((GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS || GET_CODE (op0) == MINUS)
3362 && (GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS || GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS))
3363 {
3364 rtx lhs0 = XEXP (op0, 0), lhs1 = XEXP (op0, 1);
3365 rtx rhs0 = XEXP (op1, 0), rhs1 = XEXP (op1, 1);
3366 int lhs_neg = GET_CODE (op0) == MINUS;
3367 int rhs_neg = GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS;
3368 rtx lhs = 0, rhs = 0;
3369
3370 /* Set LHS and RHS to the two different terms. */
3371 if (rtx_equal_p (lhs0, rhs0) && ! side_effects_p (lhs0))
3372 lhs = lhs1, rhs = rhs1;
3373 else if (! rhs_neg && rtx_equal_p (lhs0, rhs1)
3374 && ! side_effects_p (lhs0))
3375 lhs = lhs1, rhs = rhs0;
3376 else if (! lhs_neg && rtx_equal_p (lhs1, rhs0)
3377 && ! side_effects_p (lhs1))
3378 lhs = lhs0, rhs = rhs1;
3379 else if (! lhs_neg && ! rhs_neg && rtx_equal_p (lhs1, rhs1)
3380 && ! side_effects_p (lhs1))
3381 lhs = lhs0, rhs = rhs0;
3382
3383 /* The RHS is the operand of a MINUS, so its negation
3384 status should be complemented. */
3385 rhs_neg = ! rhs_neg;
3386
3387 /* If we found two values equal, form the sum or difference
3388 of the remaining two terms. */
3389 if (lhs)
3390 {
3391 rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (lhs_neg == rhs_neg
3392 ? PLUS : MINUS,
3393 mode,
3394 lhs_neg ? rhs : lhs,
3395 lhs_neg ? lhs : rhs);
3396 if (tem == 0)
3397 tem = gen_rtx (lhs_neg == rhs_neg
3398 ? PLUS : MINUS,
3399 mode, lhs_neg ? rhs : lhs,
3400 lhs_neg ? lhs : rhs);
3401
3402 /* If both sides negated, negate result. */
3403 if (lhs_neg && rhs_neg)
3404 {
3405 rtx tem1
3406 = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, tem, mode);
3407 if (tem1 == 0)
3408 tem1 = gen_rtx (NEG, mode, tem);
3409 tem = tem1;
3410 }
3411
3412 return tem;
3413 }
3414
3415 return 0;
3416 }
3417
3418 /* c1 - (a + c2) becomes (c1 - c2) - a. */
3419 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS
3420 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op1, 1)) == CONST_INT)
3421 {
3422 rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode, op0,
3423 XEXP (op1, 1));
3424
3425 return tem ? gen_rtx (MINUS, mode, tem, XEXP (op1, 0)) : 0;
3426 }
3427
3428 /* c1 - (c2 - a) becomes (c1 - c2) + a. */
3429 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS
3430 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op1, 0)) == CONST_INT)
3431 {
3432 rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode, op0,
3433 XEXP (op1, 0));
3434
3435 return (tem && GET_CODE (tem) == CONST_INT
3436 ? plus_constant (XEXP (op1, 1), INTVAL (tem))
3437 : 0);
3438 }
3439
3440 /* Don't let a relocatable value get a negative coeff. */
3441 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
3442 return plus_constant (op0, - INTVAL (op1));
3443 break;
3444
3445 case MULT:
3446 if (op1 == constm1_rtx)
3447 {
3448 rtx tem = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, op0, mode);
3449
3450 return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (NEG, mode, op0);
3451 }
3452
3453 /* In IEEE floating point, x*0 is not always 0. */
3454 if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
3455 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
3456 && op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode)
3457 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3458 return op1;
3459
3460 /* In IEEE floating point, x*1 is not equivalent to x for nans.
3461 However, ANSI says we can drop signals,
3462 so we can do this anyway. */
3463 if (op1 == CONST1_RTX (mode))
3464 return op0;
3465
3466 /* Convert multiply by constant power of two into shift. */
3467 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3468 && (val = exact_log2 (INTVAL (op1))) >= 0)
3469 return gen_rtx (ASHIFT, mode, op0,
3470 gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, val));
3471
3472 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
3473 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op1)) == MODE_FLOAT)
3474 {
3475 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
3476 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op1);
3477
3478 /* x*2 is x+x and x*(-1) is -x */
3479 if (REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d, dconst2)
3480 && GET_MODE (op0) == mode)
3481 return gen_rtx (PLUS, mode, op0, copy_rtx (op0));
3482
3483 else if (REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d, dconstm1)
3484 && GET_MODE (op0) == mode)
3485 return gen_rtx (NEG, mode, op0);
3486 }
3487 break;
3488
3489 case IOR:
3490 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
3491 return op0;
3492 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3493 && (INTVAL (op1) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
3494 return op1;
3495 if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3496 return op0;
3497 /* A | (~A) -> -1 */
3498 if (((GET_CODE (op0) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 0), op1))
3499 || (GET_CODE (op1) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 0), op0)))
3500 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3501 return constm1_rtx;
3502 break;
3503
3504 case XOR:
3505 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
3506 return op0;
3507 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3508 && (INTVAL (op1) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
3509 return gen_rtx (NOT, mode, op0);
3510 if (op0 == op1 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3511 return const0_rtx;
3512 break;
3513
3514 case AND:
3515 if (op1 == const0_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3516 return const0_rtx;
3517 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3518 && (INTVAL (op1) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
3519 return op0;
3520 if (op0 == op1 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3521 return op0;
3522 /* A & (~A) -> 0 */
3523 if (((GET_CODE (op0) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 0), op1))
3524 || (GET_CODE (op1) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 0), op0)))
3525 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3526 return const0_rtx;
3527 break;
3528
3529 case UDIV:
3530 /* Convert divide by power of two into shift (divide by 1 handled
3531 below). */
3532 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3533 && (arg1 = exact_log2 (INTVAL (op1))) > 0)
3534 return gen_rtx (LSHIFTRT, mode, op0,
3535 gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, arg1));
3536
3537 /* ... fall through ... */
3538
3539 case DIV:
3540 if (op1 == CONST1_RTX (mode))
3541 return op0;
3542 else if (op0 == CONST0_RTX (mode)
3543 && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3544 return op0;
3545 #if 0 /* Turned off till an expert says this is a safe thing to do. */
3546 #if ! defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
3547 /* Change division by a constant into multiplication. */
3548 else if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
3549 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op1)) == MODE_FLOAT
3550 && op1 != CONST0_RTX (mode))
3551 {
3552 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
3553 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op1);
3554 if (REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d, dconst0))
3555 abort();
3556 #if defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
3557 REAL_ARITHMETIC (d, RDIV_EXPR, dconst1, d);
3558 return gen_rtx (MULT, mode, op0,
3559 CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode));
3560 #else
3561 return gen_rtx (MULT, mode, op0,
3562 CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (1./d, mode));
3563 }
3564 #endif
3565 #endif
3566 #endif
3567 break;
3568
3569 case UMOD:
3570 /* Handle modulus by power of two (mod with 1 handled below). */
3571 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3572 && exact_log2 (INTVAL (op1)) > 0)
3573 return gen_rtx (AND, mode, op0,
3574 gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, INTVAL (op1) - 1));
3575
3576 /* ... fall through ... */
3577
3578 case MOD:
3579 if ((op0 == const0_rtx || op1 == const1_rtx)
3580 && ! side_effects_p (op0) && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3581 return const0_rtx;
3582 break;
3583
3584 case ROTATERT:
3585 case ROTATE:
3586 /* Rotating ~0 always results in ~0. */
3587 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT
3588 && INTVAL (op0) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
3589 && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3590 return op0;
3591
3592 /* ... fall through ... */
3593
3594 case LSHIFT:
3595 case ASHIFT:
3596 case ASHIFTRT:
3597 case LSHIFTRT:
3598 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
3599 return op0;
3600 if (op0 == const0_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3601 return op0;
3602 break;
3603
3604 case SMIN:
3605 if (width <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3606 && INTVAL (op1) == 1 << (width -1)
3607 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3608 return op1;
3609 else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3610 return op0;
3611 break;
3612
3613 case SMAX:
3614 if (width <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3615 && INTVAL (op1) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode) >> 1
3616 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3617 return op1;
3618 else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3619 return op0;
3620 break;
3621
3622 case UMIN:
3623 if (op1 == const0_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3624 return op1;
3625 else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3626 return op0;
3627 break;
3628
3629 case UMAX:
3630 if (op1 == constm1_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3631 return op1;
3632 else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3633 return op0;
3634 break;
3635
3636 default:
3637 abort ();
3638 }
3639
3640 return 0;
3641 }
3642
3643 /* Get the integer argument values in two forms:
3644 zero-extended in ARG0, ARG1 and sign-extended in ARG0S, ARG1S. */
3645
3646 arg0 = INTVAL (op0);
3647 arg1 = INTVAL (op1);
3648
3649 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
3650 {
3651 arg0 &= (1 << width) - 1;
3652 arg1 &= (1 << width) - 1;
3653
3654 arg0s = arg0;
3655 if (arg0s & (1 << (width - 1)))
3656 arg0s |= ((-1) << width);
3657
3658 arg1s = arg1;
3659 if (arg1s & (1 << (width - 1)))
3660 arg1s |= ((-1) << width);
3661 }
3662 else
3663 {
3664 arg0s = arg0;
3665 arg1s = arg1;
3666 }
3667
3668 /* Compute the value of the arithmetic. */
3669
3670 switch (code)
3671 {
3672 case PLUS:
3673 val = arg0s + arg1s;
3674 break;
3675
3676 case MINUS:
3677 val = arg0s - arg1s;
3678 break;
3679
3680 case MULT:
3681 val = arg0s * arg1s;
3682 break;
3683
3684 case DIV:
3685 if (arg1s == 0)
3686 return 0;
3687 val = arg0s / arg1s;
3688 break;
3689
3690 case MOD:
3691 if (arg1s == 0)
3692 return 0;
3693 val = arg0s % arg1s;
3694 break;
3695
3696 case UDIV:
3697 if (arg1 == 0)
3698 return 0;
3699 val = (unsigned) arg0 / arg1;
3700 break;
3701
3702 case UMOD:
3703 if (arg1 == 0)
3704 return 0;
3705 val = (unsigned) arg0 % arg1;
3706 break;
3707
3708 case AND:
3709 val = arg0 & arg1;
3710 break;
3711
3712 case IOR:
3713 val = arg0 | arg1;
3714 break;
3715
3716 case XOR:
3717 val = arg0 ^ arg1;
3718 break;
3719
3720 case LSHIFTRT:
3721 /* If shift count is undefined, don't fold it; let the machine do
3722 what it wants. But truncate it if the machine will do that. */
3723 if (arg1 < 0)
3724 return 0;
3725
3726 #ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
3727 arg1 &= (BITS_PER_WORD - 1);
3728 #endif
3729
3730 if (arg1 >= width)
3731 return 0;
3732
3733 val = ((unsigned) arg0) >> arg1;
3734 break;
3735
3736 case ASHIFT:
3737 case LSHIFT:
3738 if (arg1 < 0)
3739 return 0;
3740
3741 #ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
3742 arg1 &= (BITS_PER_WORD - 1);
3743 #endif
3744
3745 if (arg1 >= width)
3746 return 0;
3747
3748 val = ((unsigned) arg0) << arg1;
3749 break;
3750
3751 case ASHIFTRT:
3752 if (arg1 < 0)
3753 return 0;
3754
3755 #ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
3756 arg1 &= (BITS_PER_WORD - 1);
3757 #endif
3758
3759 if (arg1 >= width)
3760 return 0;
3761
3762 val = arg0s >> arg1;
3763 break;
3764
3765 case ROTATERT:
3766 if (arg1 < 0)
3767 return 0;
3768
3769 arg1 %= width;
3770 val = ((((unsigned) arg0) << (width - arg1))
3771 | (((unsigned) arg0) >> arg1));
3772 break;
3773
3774 case ROTATE:
3775 if (arg1 < 0)
3776 return 0;
3777
3778 arg1 %= width;
3779 val = ((((unsigned) arg0) << arg1)
3780 | (((unsigned) arg0) >> (width - arg1)));
3781 break;
3782
3783 case COMPARE:
3784 /* Do nothing here. */
3785 return 0;
3786
3787 case SMIN:
3788 val = arg0s <= arg1s ? arg0s : arg1s;
3789 break;
3790
3791 case UMIN:
3792 val = (unsigned int)arg0 <= (unsigned int)arg1 ? arg0 : arg1;
3793 break;
3794
3795 case SMAX:
3796 val = arg0s > arg1s ? arg0s : arg1s;
3797 break;
3798
3799 case UMAX:
3800 val = (unsigned int)arg0 > (unsigned int)arg1 ? arg0 : arg1;
3801 break;
3802
3803 default:
3804 abort ();
3805 }
3806
3807 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode, unless they and our sign
3808 bit are all one. So we get either a reasonable negative value or a
3809 reasonable unsigned value for this mode. */
3810 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
3811 && ((val & ((-1) << (width - 1))) != ((-1) << (width - 1))))
3812 val &= (1 << width) - 1;
3813
3814 return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, val);
3815 }
3816 \f
3817 /* Like simplify_binary_operation except used for relational operators.
3818 MODE is the mode of the operands, not that of the result. */
3819
3820 rtx
3821 simplify_relational_operation (code, mode, op0, op1)
3822 enum rtx_code code;
3823 enum machine_mode mode;
3824 rtx op0, op1;
3825 {
3826 register int arg0, arg1, arg0s, arg1s;
3827 int val;
3828 int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
3829
3830 /* If op0 is a compare, extract the comparison arguments from it. */
3831 if (GET_CODE (op0) == COMPARE && op1 == const0_rtx)
3832 op1 = XEXP (op0, 1), op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
3833
3834 if (GET_CODE (op0) != CONST_INT || GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_INT
3835 || width > HOST_BITS_PER_INT || width == 0)
3836 {
3837 /* Even if we can't compute a constant result,
3838 there are some cases worth simplifying. */
3839
3840 /* For non-IEEE floating-point, if the two operands are equal, we know
3841 the result. */
3842 if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1)
3843 && (TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
3844 || GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) != MODE_FLOAT))
3845 return (code == EQ || code == GE || code == LE || code == LEU
3846 || code == GEU) ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
3847 else if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE
3848 && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
3849 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_FLOAT)
3850 {
3851 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d0, d1;
3852 int value;
3853 jmp_buf handler;
3854 int op0lt, op1lt, equal;
3855
3856 if (setjmp (handler))
3857 return 0;
3858
3859 set_float_handler (handler);
3860 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d0, op0);
3861 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d1, op1);
3862 equal = REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d0, d1);
3863 op0lt = REAL_VALUES_LESS (d0, d1);
3864 op1lt = REAL_VALUES_LESS (d1, d0);
3865 set_float_handler (0);
3866
3867 switch (code)
3868 {
3869 case EQ:
3870 return equal ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
3871 case NE:
3872 return !equal ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
3873 case LE:
3874 return equal || op0lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
3875 case LT:
3876 return op0lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
3877 case GE:
3878 return equal || op1lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
3879 case GT:
3880 return op1lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
3881 }
3882 }
3883
3884 switch (code)
3885 {
3886 case EQ:
3887 {
3888 #if 0
3889 /* We can't make this assumption due to #pragma weak */
3890 if (CONSTANT_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx)
3891 return const0_rtx;
3892 #endif
3893 if (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx
3894 /* On some machines, the ap reg can be 0 sometimes. */
3895 && op0 != arg_pointer_rtx)
3896 return const0_rtx;
3897 break;
3898 }
3899
3900 case NE:
3901 #if 0
3902 /* We can't make this assumption due to #pragma weak */
3903 if (CONSTANT_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx)
3904 return const_true_rtx;
3905 #endif
3906 if (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx
3907 /* On some machines, the ap reg can be 0 sometimes. */
3908 && op0 != arg_pointer_rtx)
3909 return const_true_rtx;
3910 break;
3911
3912 case GEU:
3913 /* Unsigned values are never negative, but we must be sure we are
3914 actually comparing a value, not a CC operand. */
3915 if (op1 == const0_rtx
3916 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
3917 return const_true_rtx;
3918 break;
3919
3920 case LTU:
3921 if (op1 == const0_rtx
3922 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
3923 return const0_rtx;
3924 break;
3925
3926 case LEU:
3927 /* Unsigned values are never greater than the largest
3928 unsigned value. */
3929 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3930 && INTVAL (op1) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
3931 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
3932 return const_true_rtx;
3933 break;
3934
3935 case GTU:
3936 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3937 && INTVAL (op1) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
3938 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
3939 return const0_rtx;
3940 break;
3941 }
3942
3943 return 0;
3944 }
3945
3946 /* Get the integer argument values in two forms:
3947 zero-extended in ARG0, ARG1 and sign-extended in ARG0S, ARG1S. */
3948
3949 arg0 = INTVAL (op0);
3950 arg1 = INTVAL (op1);
3951
3952 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
3953 {
3954 arg0 &= (1 << width) - 1;
3955 arg1 &= (1 << width) - 1;
3956
3957 arg0s = arg0;
3958 if (arg0s & (1 << (width - 1)))
3959 arg0s |= ((-1) << width);
3960
3961 arg1s = arg1;
3962 if (arg1s & (1 << (width - 1)))
3963 arg1s |= ((-1) << width);
3964 }
3965 else
3966 {
3967 arg0s = arg0;
3968 arg1s = arg1;
3969 }
3970
3971 /* Compute the value of the arithmetic. */
3972
3973 switch (code)
3974 {
3975 case NE:
3976 val = arg0 != arg1 ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
3977 break;
3978
3979 case EQ:
3980 val = arg0 == arg1 ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
3981 break;
3982
3983 case LE:
3984 val = arg0s <= arg1s ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
3985 break;
3986
3987 case LT:
3988 val = arg0s < arg1s ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
3989 break;
3990
3991 case GE:
3992 val = arg0s >= arg1s ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
3993 break;
3994
3995 case GT:
3996 val = arg0s > arg1s ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
3997 break;
3998
3999 case LEU:
4000 val = ((unsigned) arg0) <= ((unsigned) arg1) ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4001 break;
4002
4003 case LTU:
4004 val = ((unsigned) arg0) < ((unsigned) arg1) ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4005 break;
4006
4007 case GEU:
4008 val = ((unsigned) arg0) >= ((unsigned) arg1) ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4009 break;
4010
4011 case GTU:
4012 val = ((unsigned) arg0) > ((unsigned) arg1) ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4013 break;
4014
4015 default:
4016 abort ();
4017 }
4018
4019 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode, unless they and our sign
4020 bit are all one. So we get either a reasonable negative value or a
4021 reasonable unsigned value for this mode. */
4022 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
4023 && ((val & ((-1) << (width - 1))) != ((-1) << (width - 1))))
4024 val &= (1 << width) - 1;
4025
4026 return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, val);
4027 }
4028 \f
4029 /* Simplify CODE, an operation with result mode MODE and three operands,
4030 OP0, OP1, and OP2. OP0_MODE was the mode of OP0 before it became
4031 a constant. Return 0 if no simplifications is possible. */
4032
4033 rtx
4034 simplify_ternary_operation (code, mode, op0_mode, op0, op1, op2)
4035 enum rtx_code code;
4036 enum machine_mode mode, op0_mode;
4037 rtx op0, op1, op2;
4038 {
4039 int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
4040
4041 /* VOIDmode means "infinite" precision. */
4042 if (width == 0)
4043 width = HOST_BITS_PER_INT;
4044
4045 switch (code)
4046 {
4047 case SIGN_EXTRACT:
4048 case ZERO_EXTRACT:
4049 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT
4050 && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
4051 && GET_CODE (op2) == CONST_INT
4052 && INTVAL (op1) + INTVAL (op2) <= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op0_mode)
4053 && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
4054 {
4055 /* Extracting a bit-field from a constant */
4056 int val = INTVAL (op0);
4057
4058 #if BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
4059 val >>= (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op0_mode) - INTVAL (op2) - INTVAL (op1));
4060 #else
4061 val >>= INTVAL (op2);
4062 #endif
4063 if (HOST_BITS_PER_INT != INTVAL (op1))
4064 {
4065 /* First zero-extend. */
4066 val &= (1 << INTVAL (op1)) - 1;
4067 /* If desired, propagate sign bit. */
4068 if (code == SIGN_EXTRACT && (val & (1 << (INTVAL (op1) - 1))))
4069 val |= ~ ((1 << INTVAL (op1)) - 1);
4070 }
4071
4072 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode,
4073 unless they and our sign bit are all one.
4074 So we get either a reasonable negative value or a reasonable
4075 unsigned value for this mode. */
4076 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
4077 && ((val & ((-1) << (width - 1))) != ((-1) << (width - 1))))
4078 val &= (1 << width) - 1;
4079
4080 return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, val);
4081 }
4082 break;
4083
4084 case IF_THEN_ELSE:
4085 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT)
4086 return op0 != const0_rtx ? op1 : op2;
4087 break;
4088
4089 default:
4090 abort ();
4091 }
4092
4093 return 0;
4094 }
4095 \f
4096 /* If X is a nontrivial arithmetic operation on an argument
4097 for which a constant value can be determined, return
4098 the result of operating on that value, as a constant.
4099 Otherwise, return X, possibly with one or more operands
4100 modified by recursive calls to this function.
4101
4102 If X is a register whose contents are known, we do NOT
4103 return those contents. This is because an instruction that
4104 uses a register is usually faster than one that uses a constant.
4105
4106 INSN is the insn that we may be modifying. If it is 0, make a copy
4107 of X before modifying it. */
4108
4109 static rtx
4110 fold_rtx (x, insn)
4111 rtx x;
4112 rtx insn;
4113 {
4114 register enum rtx_code code;
4115 register enum machine_mode mode;
4116 register char *fmt;
4117 register int i, val;
4118 rtx new = 0;
4119 int copied = 0;
4120 int must_swap = 0;
4121
4122 /* Folded equivalents of first two operands of X. */
4123 rtx folded_arg0;
4124 rtx folded_arg1;
4125
4126 /* Constant equivalents of first three operands of X;
4127 0 when no such equivalent is known. */
4128 rtx const_arg0;
4129 rtx const_arg1;
4130 rtx const_arg2;
4131
4132 /* The mode of the first operand of X. We need this for sign and zero
4133 extends. */
4134 enum machine_mode mode_arg0;
4135
4136 if (x == 0)
4137 return x;
4138
4139 mode = GET_MODE (x);
4140 code = GET_CODE (x);
4141 switch (code)
4142 {
4143 case CONST:
4144 case CONST_INT:
4145 case CONST_DOUBLE:
4146 case SYMBOL_REF:
4147 case LABEL_REF:
4148 case REG:
4149 /* No use simplifying an EXPR_LIST
4150 since they are used only for lists of args
4151 in a function call's REG_EQUAL note. */
4152 case EXPR_LIST:
4153 return x;
4154
4155 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
4156 case CC0:
4157 return prev_insn_cc0;
4158 #endif
4159
4160 case PC:
4161 /* If the next insn is a CODE_LABEL followed by a jump table,
4162 PC's value is a LABEL_REF pointing to that label. That
4163 lets us fold switch statements on the Vax. */
4164 if (insn && GET_CODE (insn) == JUMP_INSN)
4165 {
4166 rtx next = next_nonnote_insn (insn);
4167
4168 if (next && GET_CODE (next) == CODE_LABEL
4169 && NEXT_INSN (next) != 0
4170 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (next)) == JUMP_INSN
4171 && (GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (next))) == ADDR_VEC
4172 || GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (next))) == ADDR_DIFF_VEC))
4173 return gen_rtx (LABEL_REF, Pmode, next);
4174 }
4175 break;
4176
4177 case SUBREG:
4178 /* If this is a single word of a multi-word value, see if we previously
4179 assigned a value to that word. */
4180 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
4181 && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))) > UNITS_PER_WORD
4182 && (new = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_INT)) != 0)
4183 return new;
4184
4185 /* If this is a paradoxical SUBREG, we can't do anything with
4186 it because we have no idea what value the extra bits would have. */
4187 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))))
4188 return x;
4189
4190 /* Fold SUBREG_REG. If it changed, see if we can simplify the SUBREG.
4191 We might be able to if the SUBREG is extracting a single word in an
4192 integral mode or extracting the low part. */
4193
4194 folded_arg0 = fold_rtx (SUBREG_REG (x), insn);
4195 const_arg0 = equiv_constant (folded_arg0);
4196 if (const_arg0)
4197 folded_arg0 = const_arg0;
4198
4199 if (folded_arg0 != SUBREG_REG (x))
4200 {
4201 new = 0;
4202
4203 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
4204 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) == UNITS_PER_WORD
4205 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) != VOIDmode)
4206 new = operand_subword (folded_arg0, SUBREG_WORD (x), 0,
4207 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)));
4208 if (new == 0 && subreg_lowpart_p (x))
4209 new = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, folded_arg0);
4210 if (new)
4211 return new;
4212 }
4213
4214 /* If this is a narrowing SUBREG and our operand is a REG, see if
4215 we can find an equivalence for REG that is a arithmetic operation
4216 in a wider mode where both operands are paradoxical SUBREGs
4217 from objects of our result mode. In that case, we couldn't report
4218 an equivalent value for that operation, since we don't know what the
4219 extra bits will be. But we can find an equivalence for this SUBREG
4220 by folding that operation is the narrow mode. This allows us to
4221 fold arithmetic in narrow modes when the machine only supports
4222 word-sized arithmetic. */
4223
4224 if (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG
4225 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (folded_arg0)))
4226 {
4227 struct table_elt *elt;
4228
4229 /* We can use HASH here since we know that canon_hash won't be
4230 called. */
4231 elt = lookup (folded_arg0,
4232 HASH (folded_arg0, GET_MODE (folded_arg0)),
4233 GET_MODE (folded_arg0));
4234
4235 if (elt)
4236 elt = elt->first_same_value;
4237
4238 for (; elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
4239 {
4240 /* Just check for unary and binary operations. */
4241 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (elt->exp)) == '1'
4242 && GET_CODE (elt->exp) != SIGN_EXTEND
4243 && GET_CODE (elt->exp) != ZERO_EXTEND
4244 && GET_CODE (XEXP (elt->exp, 0)) == SUBREG
4245 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (elt->exp, 0))) == mode)
4246 {
4247 rtx op0 = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (elt->exp, 0));
4248
4249 if (GET_CODE (op0) != REG && ! CONSTANT_P (op0))
4250 op0 = fold_rtx (op0, 0);
4251
4252 op0 = equiv_constant (op0);
4253 if (op0)
4254 new = simplify_unary_operation (GET_CODE (elt->exp), mode,
4255 op0, mode);
4256 }
4257 else if ((GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (elt->exp)) == '2'
4258 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (elt->exp)) == 'c')
4259 && ((GET_CODE (XEXP (elt->exp, 0)) == SUBREG
4260 && (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (elt->exp, 0)))
4261 == mode))
4262 || CONSTANT_P (XEXP (elt->exp, 0)))
4263 && ((GET_CODE (XEXP (elt->exp, 1)) == SUBREG
4264 && (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (elt->exp, 1)))
4265 == mode))
4266 || CONSTANT_P (XEXP (elt->exp, 1))))
4267 {
4268 rtx op0 = gen_lowpart_common (mode, XEXP (elt->exp, 0));
4269 rtx op1 = gen_lowpart_common (mode, XEXP (elt->exp, 1));
4270
4271 if (op0 && GET_CODE (op0) != REG && ! CONSTANT_P (op0))
4272 op0 = fold_rtx (op0, 0);
4273
4274 if (op0)
4275 op0 = equiv_constant (op0);
4276
4277 if (op1 && GET_CODE (op1) != REG && ! CONSTANT_P (op1))
4278 op1 = fold_rtx (op1, 0);
4279
4280 if (op1)
4281 op1 = equiv_constant (op1);
4282
4283 if (op0 && op1)
4284 new = simplify_binary_operation (GET_CODE (elt->exp), mode,
4285 op0, op1);
4286 }
4287
4288 if (new)
4289 return new;
4290 }
4291 }
4292
4293 return x;
4294
4295 case NOT:
4296 case NEG:
4297 /* If we have (NOT Y), see if Y is known to be (NOT Z).
4298 If so, (NOT Y) simplifies to Z. Similarly for NEG. */
4299 new = lookup_as_function (XEXP (x, 0), code);
4300 if (new)
4301 return fold_rtx (copy_rtx (XEXP (new, 0)), insn);
4302 break;
4303
4304 case MEM:
4305 /* If we are not actually processing an insn, don't try to find the
4306 best address. Not only don't we care, but we could modify the
4307 MEM in an invalid way since we have no insn to validate against. */
4308 if (insn != 0)
4309 find_best_addr (insn, &XEXP (x, 0));
4310
4311 {
4312 /* Even if we don't fold in the insn itself,
4313 we can safely do so here, in hopes of getting a constant. */
4314 rtx addr = fold_rtx (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
4315 rtx base = 0;
4316 int offset = 0;
4317
4318 if (GET_CODE (addr) == REG
4319 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (addr))
4320 && GET_MODE (addr) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]]
4321 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]] != 0)
4322 addr = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]];
4323
4324 /* If address is constant, split it into a base and integer offset. */
4325 if (GET_CODE (addr) == SYMBOL_REF || GET_CODE (addr) == LABEL_REF)
4326 base = addr;
4327 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == CONST && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == PLUS
4328 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (addr, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT)
4329 {
4330 base = XEXP (XEXP (addr, 0), 0);
4331 offset = INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (addr, 0), 1));
4332 }
4333 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == LO_SUM
4334 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == SYMBOL_REF)
4335 base = XEXP (addr, 1);
4336
4337 /* If this is a constant pool reference, we can fold it into its
4338 constant to allow better value tracking. */
4339 if (base && GET_CODE (base) == SYMBOL_REF
4340 && CONSTANT_POOL_ADDRESS_P (base))
4341 {
4342 rtx constant = get_pool_constant (base);
4343 enum machine_mode const_mode = get_pool_mode (base);
4344 rtx new;
4345
4346 if (CONSTANT_P (constant) && GET_CODE (constant) != CONST_INT)
4347 constant_pool_entries_cost = COST (constant);
4348
4349 /* If we are loading the full constant, we have an equivalence. */
4350 if (offset == 0 && mode == const_mode)
4351 return constant;
4352
4353 /* If this actually isn't a constant (wierd!), we can't do
4354 anything. Otherwise, handle the two most common cases:
4355 extracting a word from a multi-word constant, and extracting
4356 the low-order bits. Other cases don't seem common enough to
4357 worry about. */
4358 if (! CONSTANT_P (constant))
4359 return x;
4360
4361 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
4362 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) == UNITS_PER_WORD
4363 && offset % UNITS_PER_WORD == 0
4364 && (new = operand_subword (constant,
4365 offset / UNITS_PER_WORD,
4366 0, const_mode)) != 0)
4367 return new;
4368
4369 if (((BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
4370 && offset == GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (constant)) - 1)
4371 || (! BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN && offset == 0))
4372 && (new = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, constant)) != 0)
4373 return new;
4374 }
4375
4376 /* If this is a reference to a label at a known position in a jump
4377 table, we also know its value. */
4378 if (base && GET_CODE (base) == LABEL_REF)
4379 {
4380 rtx label = XEXP (base, 0);
4381 rtx table_insn = NEXT_INSN (label);
4382
4383 if (table_insn && GET_CODE (table_insn) == JUMP_INSN
4384 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (table_insn)) == ADDR_VEC)
4385 {
4386 rtx table = PATTERN (table_insn);
4387
4388 if (offset >= 0
4389 && (offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table))
4390 < XVECLEN (table, 0)))
4391 return XVECEXP (table, 0,
4392 offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table)));
4393 }
4394 if (table_insn && GET_CODE (table_insn) == JUMP_INSN
4395 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (table_insn)) == ADDR_DIFF_VEC)
4396 {
4397 rtx table = PATTERN (table_insn);
4398
4399 if (offset >= 0
4400 && (offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table))
4401 < XVECLEN (table, 1)))
4402 {
4403 offset /= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table));
4404 new = gen_rtx (MINUS, Pmode, XVECEXP (table, 1, offset),
4405 XEXP (table, 0));
4406
4407 if (GET_MODE (table) != Pmode)
4408 new = gen_rtx (TRUNCATE, GET_MODE (table), new);
4409
4410 return new;
4411 }
4412 }
4413 }
4414
4415 return x;
4416 }
4417 }
4418
4419 const_arg0 = 0;
4420 const_arg1 = 0;
4421 const_arg2 = 0;
4422 mode_arg0 = VOIDmode;
4423
4424 /* Try folding our operands.
4425 Then see which ones have constant values known. */
4426
4427 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
4428 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
4429 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
4430 {
4431 rtx arg = XEXP (x, i);
4432 rtx folded_arg = arg, const_arg = 0;
4433 enum machine_mode mode_arg = GET_MODE (arg);
4434 rtx cheap_arg, expensive_arg;
4435 rtx replacements[2];
4436 int j;
4437
4438 /* Most arguments are cheap, so handle them specially. */
4439 switch (GET_CODE (arg))
4440 {
4441 case REG:
4442 /* This is the same as calling equiv_constant; it is duplicated
4443 here for speed. */
4444 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (arg))
4445 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]] != 0
4446 && GET_CODE (qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]]) != REG
4447 && GET_CODE (qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]]) != PLUS)
4448 const_arg
4449 = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (arg),
4450 qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]]);
4451 break;
4452
4453 case CONST:
4454 case CONST_INT:
4455 case SYMBOL_REF:
4456 case LABEL_REF:
4457 case CONST_DOUBLE:
4458 const_arg = arg;
4459 break;
4460
4461 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
4462 case CC0:
4463 folded_arg = prev_insn_cc0;
4464 mode_arg = prev_insn_cc0_mode;
4465 const_arg = equiv_constant (folded_arg);
4466 break;
4467 #endif
4468
4469 default:
4470 folded_arg = fold_rtx (arg, insn);
4471 const_arg = equiv_constant (folded_arg);
4472 }
4473
4474 /* For the first three operands, see if the operand
4475 is constant or equivalent to a constant. */
4476 switch (i)
4477 {
4478 case 0:
4479 folded_arg0 = folded_arg;
4480 const_arg0 = const_arg;
4481 mode_arg0 = mode_arg;
4482 break;
4483 case 1:
4484 folded_arg1 = folded_arg;
4485 const_arg1 = const_arg;
4486 break;
4487 case 2:
4488 const_arg2 = const_arg;
4489 break;
4490 }
4491
4492 /* Pick the least expensive of the folded argument and an
4493 equivalent constant argument. */
4494 if (const_arg == 0 || const_arg == folded_arg
4495 || COST (const_arg) > COST (folded_arg))
4496 cheap_arg = folded_arg, expensive_arg = const_arg;
4497 else
4498 cheap_arg = const_arg, expensive_arg = folded_arg;
4499
4500 /* Try to replace the operand with the cheapest of the two
4501 possibilities. If it doesn't work and this is either of the first
4502 two operands of a commutative operation, try swapping them.
4503 If THAT fails, try the more expensive, provided it is cheaper
4504 than what is already there. */
4505
4506 if (cheap_arg == XEXP (x, i))
4507 continue;
4508
4509 if (insn == 0 && ! copied)
4510 {
4511 x = copy_rtx (x);
4512 copied = 1;
4513 }
4514
4515 replacements[0] = cheap_arg, replacements[1] = expensive_arg;
4516 for (j = 0;
4517 j < 2 && replacements[j]
4518 && COST (replacements[j]) < COST (XEXP (x, i));
4519 j++)
4520 {
4521 if (validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, i), replacements[j], 0))
4522 break;
4523
4524 if (code == NE || code == EQ || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'c')
4525 {
4526 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, i), XEXP (x, 1 - i), 1);
4527 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, 1 - i), replacements[j], 1);
4528
4529 if (apply_change_group ())
4530 {
4531 /* Swap them back to be invalid so that this loop can
4532 continue and flag them to be swapped back later. */
4533 rtx tem;
4534
4535 tem = XEXP (x, 0); XEXP (x, 0) = XEXP (x, 1);
4536 XEXP (x, 1) = tem;
4537 must_swap = 1;
4538 break;
4539 }
4540 }
4541 }
4542 }
4543
4544 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
4545 /* Don't try to fold inside of a vector of expressions.
4546 Doing nothing is harmless. */
4547 ;
4548
4549 /* If a commutative operation, place a constant integer as the second
4550 operand unless the first operand is also a constant integer. Otherwise,
4551 place any constant second unless the first operand is also a constant. */
4552
4553 if (code == EQ || code == NE || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'c')
4554 {
4555 if (must_swap || (const_arg0
4556 && (const_arg1 == 0
4557 || (GET_CODE (const_arg0) == CONST_INT
4558 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) != CONST_INT))))
4559 {
4560 register rtx tem = XEXP (x, 0);
4561
4562 if (insn == 0 && ! copied)
4563 {
4564 x = copy_rtx (x);
4565 copied = 1;
4566 }
4567
4568 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1), 1);
4569 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, 1), tem, 1);
4570 if (apply_change_group ())
4571 {
4572 tem = const_arg0, const_arg0 = const_arg1, const_arg1 = tem;
4573 tem = folded_arg0, folded_arg0 = folded_arg1, folded_arg1 = tem;
4574 }
4575 }
4576 }
4577
4578 /* If X is an arithmetic operation, see if we can simplify it. */
4579
4580 switch (GET_RTX_CLASS (code))
4581 {
4582 case '1':
4583 /* We can't simplify extension ops unless we know the original mode. */
4584 if ((code == ZERO_EXTEND || code == SIGN_EXTEND)
4585 && mode_arg0 == VOIDmode)
4586 break;
4587 new = simplify_unary_operation (code, mode,
4588 const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
4589 mode_arg0);
4590 break;
4591
4592 case '<':
4593 /* See what items are actually being compared and set FOLDED_ARG[01]
4594 to those values and CODE to the actual comparison code. If any are
4595 constant, set CONST_ARG0 and CONST_ARG1 appropriately. We needn't
4596 do anything if both operands are already known to be constant. */
4597
4598 if (const_arg0 == 0 || const_arg1 == 0)
4599 {
4600 struct table_elt *p0, *p1;
4601
4602 code = find_comparison_args (code, &folded_arg0, &folded_arg1);
4603 const_arg0 = equiv_constant (folded_arg0);
4604 const_arg1 = equiv_constant (folded_arg1);
4605
4606 /* Get a mode from the values actually being compared, or from the
4607 old value of MODE_ARG0 if both are constants. If the resulting
4608 mode is VOIDmode or a MODE_CC mode, we don't know what kinds
4609 of things are being compared, so we can't do anything with this
4610 comparison. */
4611
4612 if (GET_MODE (folded_arg0) != VOIDmode
4613 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (folded_arg0)) != MODE_CC)
4614 mode_arg0 = GET_MODE (folded_arg0);
4615
4616 else if (GET_MODE (folded_arg1) != VOIDmode
4617 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (folded_arg1)) != MODE_CC)
4618 mode_arg0 = GET_MODE (folded_arg1);
4619
4620 if (mode_arg0 == VOIDmode || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode_arg0) == MODE_CC)
4621 break;
4622
4623 /* If we do not now have two constants being compared, see if we
4624 can nevertheless deduce some things about the comparison. */
4625 if (const_arg0 == 0 || const_arg1 == 0)
4626 {
4627 /* Is FOLDED_ARG0 frame-pointer plus a constant? Or non-explicit
4628 constant? These aren't zero, but we don't know their sign. */
4629 if (const_arg1 == const0_rtx
4630 && (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (folded_arg0)
4631 #if 0 /* Sad to say, on sysvr4, #pragma weak can make a symbol address
4632 come out as 0. */
4633 || GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == SYMBOL_REF
4634 #endif
4635 || GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == LABEL_REF
4636 || GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == CONST))
4637 {
4638 if (code == EQ)
4639 return const0_rtx;
4640 else if (code == NE)
4641 return const_true_rtx;
4642 }
4643
4644 /* See if the two operands are the same. We don't do this
4645 for IEEE floating-point since we can't assume x == x
4646 since x might be a NaN. */
4647
4648 if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
4649 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode_arg0) != MODE_FLOAT)
4650 && (folded_arg0 == folded_arg1
4651 || (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG
4652 && GET_CODE (folded_arg1) == REG
4653 && (reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg0)]
4654 == reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg1)]))
4655 || ((p0 = lookup (folded_arg0,
4656 (safe_hash (folded_arg0, mode_arg0)
4657 % NBUCKETS), mode_arg0))
4658 && (p1 = lookup (folded_arg1,
4659 (safe_hash (folded_arg1, mode_arg0)
4660 % NBUCKETS), mode_arg0))
4661 && p0->first_same_value == p1->first_same_value)))
4662 return ((code == EQ || code == LE || code == GE
4663 || code == LEU || code == GEU)
4664 ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx);
4665
4666 /* If FOLDED_ARG0 is a register, see if the comparison we are
4667 doing now is either the same as we did before or the reverse
4668 (we only check the reverse if not floating-point). */
4669 else if (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG)
4670 {
4671 int qty = reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg0)];
4672
4673 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (folded_arg0))
4674 && (comparison_dominates_p (qty_comparison_code[qty], code)
4675 || (comparison_dominates_p (qty_comparison_code[qty],
4676 reverse_condition (code))
4677 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode_arg0) == MODE_INT))
4678 && (rtx_equal_p (qty_comparison_const[qty], folded_arg1)
4679 || (const_arg1
4680 && rtx_equal_p (qty_comparison_const[qty],
4681 const_arg1))
4682 || (GET_CODE (folded_arg1) == REG
4683 && (reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg1)]
4684 == qty_comparison_qty[qty]))))
4685 return (comparison_dominates_p (qty_comparison_code[qty],
4686 code)
4687 ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx);
4688 }
4689 }
4690 }
4691
4692 /* If we are comparing against zero, see if the first operand is
4693 equivalent to an IOR with a constant. If so, we may be able to
4694 determine the result of this comparison. */
4695
4696 if (const_arg1 == const0_rtx)
4697 {
4698 rtx y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, IOR);
4699 rtx inner_const;
4700
4701 if (y != 0
4702 && (inner_const = equiv_constant (XEXP (y, 1))) != 0
4703 && GET_CODE (inner_const) == CONST_INT
4704 && INTVAL (inner_const) != 0)
4705 {
4706 int sign_bitnum = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode_arg0) - 1;
4707 int has_sign = (HOST_BITS_PER_INT >= sign_bitnum
4708 && (INTVAL (inner_const) & (1 << sign_bitnum)));
4709
4710 switch (code)
4711 {
4712 case EQ:
4713 return const0_rtx;
4714 case NE:
4715 return const_true_rtx;
4716 case LT: case LE:
4717 if (has_sign)
4718 return const_true_rtx;
4719 break;
4720 case GT: case GE:
4721 if (has_sign)
4722 return const0_rtx;
4723 break;
4724 }
4725 }
4726 }
4727
4728 new = simplify_relational_operation (code, mode_arg0,
4729 const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
4730 const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1);
4731 break;
4732
4733 case '2':
4734 case 'c':
4735 switch (code)
4736 {
4737 case PLUS:
4738 /* If the second operand is a LABEL_REF, see if the first is a MINUS
4739 with that LABEL_REF as its second operand. If so, the result is
4740 the first operand of that MINUS. This handles switches with an
4741 ADDR_DIFF_VEC table. */
4742 if (const_arg1 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) == LABEL_REF)
4743 {
4744 rtx y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, MINUS);
4745
4746 if (y != 0 && GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 1)) == LABEL_REF
4747 && XEXP (XEXP (y, 1), 0) == XEXP (const_arg1, 0))
4748 return XEXP (y, 0);
4749 }
4750
4751 /* ... fall through ... */
4752
4753 case MINUS:
4754 case SMIN: case SMAX: case UMIN: case UMAX:
4755 case IOR: case AND: case XOR:
4756 case MULT: case DIV: case UDIV:
4757 case ASHIFT: case LSHIFTRT: case ASHIFTRT:
4758 /* If we have (<op> <reg> <const_int>) for an associative OP and REG
4759 is known to be of similar form, we may be able to replace the
4760 operation with a combined operation. This may eliminate the
4761 intermediate operation if every use is simplified in this way.
4762 Note that the similar optimization done by combine.c only works
4763 if the intermediate operation's result has only one reference. */
4764
4765 if (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG
4766 && const_arg1 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) == CONST_INT)
4767 {
4768 int is_shift
4769 = (code == ASHIFT || code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT);
4770 rtx y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, code);
4771 rtx inner_const;
4772 enum rtx_code associate_code;
4773 rtx new_const;
4774
4775 if (y == 0
4776 || 0 == (inner_const
4777 = equiv_constant (fold_rtx (XEXP (y, 1), 0)))
4778 || GET_CODE (inner_const) != CONST_INT
4779 /* If we have compiled a statement like
4780 "if (x == (x & mask1))", and now are looking at
4781 "x & mask2", we will have a case where the first operand
4782 of Y is the same as our first operand. Unless we detect
4783 this case, an infinite loop will result. */
4784 || XEXP (y, 0) == folded_arg0)
4785 break;
4786
4787 /* Don't associate these operations if they are a PLUS with the
4788 same constant and it is a power of two. These might be doable
4789 with a pre- or post-increment. Similarly for two subtracts of
4790 identical powers of two with post decrement. */
4791
4792 if (code == PLUS && INTVAL (const_arg1) == INTVAL (inner_const)
4793 && (0
4794 #if defined(HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT) || defined(HAVE_POST_INCREMENT)
4795 || exact_log2 (INTVAL (const_arg1)) >= 0
4796 #endif
4797 #if defined(HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT) || defined(HAVE_POST_DECREMENT)
4798 || exact_log2 (- INTVAL (const_arg1)) >= 0
4799 #endif
4800 ))
4801 break;
4802
4803 /* Compute the code used to compose the constants. For example,
4804 A/C1/C2 is A/(C1 * C2), so if CODE == DIV, we want MULT. */
4805
4806 associate_code
4807 = (code == MULT || code == DIV || code == UDIV ? MULT
4808 : is_shift || code == PLUS || code == MINUS ? PLUS : code);
4809
4810 new_const = simplify_binary_operation (associate_code, mode,
4811 const_arg1, inner_const);
4812
4813 if (new_const == 0)
4814 break;
4815
4816 /* If we are associating shift operations, don't let this
4817 produce a shift of larger than the object. This could
4818 occur when we following a sign-extend by a right shift on
4819 a machine that does a sign-extend as a pair of shifts. */
4820
4821 if (is_shift && GET_CODE (new_const) == CONST_INT
4822 && INTVAL (new_const) > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode))
4823 break;
4824
4825 y = copy_rtx (XEXP (y, 0));
4826
4827 /* If Y contains our first operand (the most common way this
4828 can happen is if Y is a MEM), we would do into an infinite
4829 loop if we tried to fold it. So don't in that case. */
4830
4831 if (! reg_mentioned_p (folded_arg0, y))
4832 y = fold_rtx (y, insn);
4833
4834 new = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode, y, new_const);
4835 if (new)
4836 return new;
4837
4838 return gen_rtx (code, mode, y, new_const);
4839 }
4840 }
4841
4842 new = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode,
4843 const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
4844 const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1);
4845 break;
4846
4847 case 'o':
4848 /* (lo_sum (high X) X) is simply X. */
4849 if (code == LO_SUM && const_arg0 != 0
4850 && GET_CODE (const_arg0) == HIGH
4851 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (const_arg0, 0), const_arg1))
4852 return const_arg1;
4853 break;
4854
4855 case '3':
4856 case 'b':
4857 new = simplify_ternary_operation (code, mode, mode_arg0,
4858 const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
4859 const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1,
4860 const_arg2 ? const_arg2 : XEXP (x, 2));
4861 break;
4862 }
4863
4864 return new ? new : x;
4865 }
4866 \f
4867 /* Return a constant value currently equivalent to X.
4868 Return 0 if we don't know one. */
4869
4870 static rtx
4871 equiv_constant (x)
4872 rtx x;
4873 {
4874 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG
4875 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x))
4876 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]])
4877 x = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (x), qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]);
4878
4879 if (x != 0 && CONSTANT_P (x))
4880 return x;
4881
4882 /* If X is a MEM, try to fold it outside the context of any insn to see if
4883 it might be equivalent to a constant. That handles the case where it
4884 is a constant-pool reference. Then try to look it up in the hash table
4885 in case it is something whose value we have seen before. */
4886
4887 if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM)
4888 {
4889 struct table_elt *elt;
4890
4891 x = fold_rtx (x, 0);
4892 if (CONSTANT_P (x))
4893 return x;
4894
4895 elt = lookup (x, safe_hash (x, GET_MODE (x)) % NBUCKETS, GET_MODE (x));
4896 if (elt == 0)
4897 return 0;
4898
4899 for (elt = elt->first_same_value; elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
4900 if (elt->is_const && CONSTANT_P (elt->exp))
4901 return elt->exp;
4902 }
4903
4904 return 0;
4905 }
4906 \f
4907 /* Assuming that X is an rtx (e.g., MEM, REG or SUBREG) for a fixed-point
4908 number, return an rtx (MEM, SUBREG, or CONST_INT) that refers to the
4909 least-significant part of X.
4910 MODE specifies how big a part of X to return.
4911
4912 If the requested operation cannot be done, 0 is returned.
4913
4914 This is similar to gen_lowpart in emit-rtl.c. */
4915
4916 rtx
4917 gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, x)
4918 enum machine_mode mode;
4919 register rtx x;
4920 {
4921 rtx result = gen_lowpart_common (mode, x);
4922
4923 if (result)
4924 return result;
4925 else if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM)
4926 {
4927 /* This is the only other case we handle. */
4928 register int offset = 0;
4929 rtx new;
4930
4931 #if WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
4932 offset = (MAX (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)), UNITS_PER_WORD)
4933 - MAX (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode), UNITS_PER_WORD));
4934 #endif
4935 #if BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
4936 /* Adjust the address so that the address-after-the-data
4937 is unchanged. */
4938 offset -= (MIN (UNITS_PER_WORD, GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
4939 - MIN (UNITS_PER_WORD, GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x))));
4940 #endif
4941 new = gen_rtx (MEM, mode, plus_constant (XEXP (x, 0), offset));
4942 if (! memory_address_p (mode, XEXP (new, 0)))
4943 return 0;
4944 MEM_VOLATILE_P (new) = MEM_VOLATILE_P (x);
4945 RTX_UNCHANGING_P (new) = RTX_UNCHANGING_P (x);
4946 MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (new) = MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (x);
4947 return new;
4948 }
4949 else
4950 return 0;
4951 }
4952 \f
4953 /* Given INSN, a jump insn, TAKEN indicates if we are following the "taken"
4954 branch. It will be zero if not.
4955
4956 In certain cases, this can cause us to add an equivalence. For example,
4957 if we are following the taken case of
4958 if (i == 2)
4959 we can add the fact that `i' and '2' are now equivalent.
4960
4961 In any case, we can record that this comparison was passed. If the same
4962 comparison is seen later, we will know its value. */
4963
4964 static void
4965 record_jump_equiv (insn, taken)
4966 rtx insn;
4967 int taken;
4968 {
4969 int cond_known_true;
4970 rtx op0, op1;
4971 enum machine_mode mode;
4972 int reversed_nonequality = 0;
4973 enum rtx_code code;
4974
4975 /* Ensure this is the right kind of insn. */
4976 if (! condjump_p (insn) || simplejump_p (insn))
4977 return;
4978
4979 /* See if this jump condition is known true or false. */
4980 if (taken)
4981 cond_known_true = (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 2) == pc_rtx);
4982 else
4983 cond_known_true = (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 1) == pc_rtx);
4984
4985 /* Get the type of comparison being done and the operands being compared.
4986 If we had to reverse a non-equality condition, record that fact so we
4987 know that it isn't valid for floating-point. */
4988 code = GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 0));
4989 op0 = fold_rtx (XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 0), 0), insn);
4990 op1 = fold_rtx (XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 0), 1), insn);
4991
4992 code = find_comparison_args (code, &op0, &op1);
4993 if (! cond_known_true)
4994 {
4995 reversed_nonequality = (code != EQ && code != NE);
4996 code = reverse_condition (code);
4997 }
4998
4999 /* The mode is the mode of the non-constant. */
5000 mode = GET_MODE (op0);
5001 if (mode == VOIDmode) mode = GET_MODE (op1);
5002
5003 record_jump_cond (code, mode, op0, op1, reversed_nonequality);
5004 }
5005
5006 /* We know that comparison CODE applied to OP0 and OP1 in MODE is true.
5007 REVERSED_NONEQUALITY is nonzero if CODE had to be swapped.
5008 Make any useful entries we can with that information. Called from
5009 above function and called recursively. */
5010
5011 static void
5012 record_jump_cond (code, mode, op0, op1, reversed_nonequality)
5013 enum rtx_code code;
5014 enum machine_mode mode;
5015 rtx op0, op1;
5016 int reversed_nonequality;
5017 {
5018 int op0_hash_code, op1_hash_code;
5019 int op0_in_memory, op0_in_struct, op1_in_memory, op1_in_struct;
5020 struct table_elt *op0_elt, *op1_elt;
5021
5022 /* If OP0 and OP1 are known equal, and either is a paradoxical SUBREG,
5023 we know that they are also equal in the smaller mode (this is also
5024 true for all smaller modes whether or not there is a SUBREG, but
5025 is not worth testing for with no SUBREG. */
5026
5027 if (code == EQ && GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG
5028 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))))
5029 {
5030 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0));
5031 rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op1);
5032
5033 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op0),
5034 tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op1, 0),
5035 reversed_nonequality);
5036 }
5037
5038 if (code == EQ && GET_CODE (op1) == SUBREG
5039 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1))))
5040 {
5041 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1));
5042 rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op0);
5043
5044 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op1),
5045 tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op0, 0),
5046 reversed_nonequality);
5047 }
5048
5049 /* Similarly, if this is an NE comparison, and either is a SUBREG
5050 making a smaller mode, we know the whole thing is also NE. */
5051
5052 if (code == NE && GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG
5053 && subreg_lowpart_p (op0)
5054 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))))
5055 {
5056 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0));
5057 rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op1);
5058
5059 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op0),
5060 tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op1, 0),
5061 reversed_nonequality);
5062 }
5063
5064 if (code == NE && GET_CODE (op1) == SUBREG
5065 && subreg_lowpart_p (op1)
5066 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1))))
5067 {
5068 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1));
5069 rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op0);
5070
5071 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op1),
5072 tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op0, 0),
5073 reversed_nonequality);
5074 }
5075
5076 /* Hash both operands. */
5077
5078 do_not_record = 0;
5079 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
5080 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
5081 op0_hash_code = HASH (op0, mode);
5082 op0_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
5083 op0_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
5084
5085 if (do_not_record)
5086 return;
5087
5088 do_not_record = 0;
5089 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
5090 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
5091 op1_hash_code = HASH (op1, mode);
5092 op1_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
5093 op1_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
5094
5095 if (do_not_record)
5096 return;
5097
5098 /* Look up both operands. */
5099 op0_elt = lookup (op0, op0_hash_code, mode);
5100 op1_elt = lookup (op1, op1_hash_code, mode);
5101
5102 /* If we aren't setting two things equal all we can do is save this
5103 comparison. */
5104 if (code != EQ)
5105 {
5106 /* If we reversed a floating-point comparison, if OP0 is not a
5107 register, or if OP1 is neither a register or constant, we can't
5108 do anything. */
5109
5110 if (GET_CODE (op1) != REG)
5111 op1 = equiv_constant (op1);
5112
5113 if ((reversed_nonequality && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
5114 || GET_CODE (op0) != REG || op1 == 0)
5115 return;
5116
5117 /* Put OP0 in the hash table if it isn't already. This gives it a
5118 new quantity number. */
5119 if (op0_elt == 0)
5120 {
5121 if (insert_regs (op0, 0, 0))
5122 {
5123 rehash_using_reg (op0);
5124 op0_hash_code = HASH (op0, mode);
5125 }
5126
5127 op0_elt = insert (op0, 0, op0_hash_code, mode);
5128 op0_elt->in_memory = op0_in_memory;
5129 op0_elt->in_struct = op0_in_struct;
5130 }
5131
5132 qty_comparison_code[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = code;
5133 if (GET_CODE (op1) == REG)
5134 {
5135 /* Put OP1 in the hash table so it gets a new quantity number. */
5136 if (op1_elt == 0)
5137 {
5138 if (insert_regs (op1, 0, 0))
5139 {
5140 rehash_using_reg (op1);
5141 op1_hash_code = HASH (op1, mode);
5142 }
5143
5144 op1_elt = insert (op1, 0, op1_hash_code, mode);
5145 op1_elt->in_memory = op1_in_memory;
5146 op1_elt->in_struct = op1_in_struct;
5147 }
5148
5149 qty_comparison_qty[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = reg_qty[REGNO (op1)];
5150 qty_comparison_const[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = 0;
5151 }
5152 else
5153 {
5154 qty_comparison_qty[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = -1;
5155 qty_comparison_const[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = op1;
5156 }
5157
5158 return;
5159 }
5160
5161 /* If both are equivalent, merge the two classes. Save this class for
5162 `cse_set_around_loop'. */
5163 if (op0_elt && op1_elt)
5164 {
5165 merge_equiv_classes (op0_elt, op1_elt);
5166 last_jump_equiv_class = op0_elt;
5167 }
5168
5169 /* For whichever side doesn't have an equivalence, make one. */
5170 if (op0_elt == 0)
5171 {
5172 if (insert_regs (op0, op1_elt, 0))
5173 {
5174 rehash_using_reg (op0);
5175 op0_hash_code = HASH (op0, mode);
5176 }
5177
5178 op0_elt = insert (op0, op1_elt, op0_hash_code, mode);
5179 op0_elt->in_memory = op0_in_memory;
5180 op0_elt->in_struct = op0_in_struct;
5181 last_jump_equiv_class = op0_elt;
5182 }
5183
5184 if (op1_elt == 0)
5185 {
5186 if (insert_regs (op1, op0_elt, 0))
5187 {
5188 rehash_using_reg (op1);
5189 op1_hash_code = HASH (op1, mode);
5190 }
5191
5192 op1_elt = insert (op1, op0_elt, op1_hash_code, mode);
5193 op1_elt->in_memory = op1_in_memory;
5194 op1_elt->in_struct = op1_in_struct;
5195 last_jump_equiv_class = op1_elt;
5196 }
5197 }
5198 \f
5199 /* CSE processing for one instruction.
5200 First simplify sources and addresses of all assignments
5201 in the instruction, using previously-computed equivalents values.
5202 Then install the new sources and destinations in the table
5203 of available values.
5204
5205 If IN_LIBCALL_BLOCK is nonzero, don't record any equivalence made in
5206 the insn. */
5207
5208 /* Data on one SET contained in the instruction. */
5209
5210 struct set
5211 {
5212 /* The SET rtx itself. */
5213 rtx rtl;
5214 /* The SET_SRC of the rtx (the original value, if it is changing). */
5215 rtx src;
5216 /* The hash-table element for the SET_SRC of the SET. */
5217 struct table_elt *src_elt;
5218 /* Hash code for the SET_SRC. */
5219 int src_hash_code;
5220 /* Hash code for the SET_DEST. */
5221 int dest_hash_code;
5222 /* The SET_DEST, with SUBREG, etc., stripped. */
5223 rtx inner_dest;
5224 /* Place where the pointer to the INNER_DEST was found. */
5225 rtx *inner_dest_loc;
5226 /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC is in memory. */
5227 char src_in_memory;
5228 /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC is in a structure. */
5229 char src_in_struct;
5230 /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC contains something
5231 whose value cannot be predicted and understood. */
5232 char src_volatile;
5233 /* Original machine mode, in case it becomes a CONST_INT. */
5234 enum machine_mode mode;
5235 /* A constant equivalent for SET_SRC, if any. */
5236 rtx src_const;
5237 /* Hash code of constant equivalent for SET_SRC. */
5238 int src_const_hash_code;
5239 /* Table entry for constant equivalent for SET_SRC, if any. */
5240 struct table_elt *src_const_elt;
5241 };
5242
5243 static void
5244 cse_insn (insn, in_libcall_block)
5245 rtx insn;
5246 int in_libcall_block;
5247 {
5248 register rtx x = PATTERN (insn);
5249 rtx tem;
5250 register int i;
5251 register int n_sets = 0;
5252
5253 /* Records what this insn does to set CC0. */
5254 rtx this_insn_cc0 = 0;
5255 enum machine_mode this_insn_cc0_mode;
5256 struct write_data writes_memory;
5257 static struct write_data init = {0, 0, 0, 0};
5258
5259 rtx src_eqv = 0;
5260 struct table_elt *src_eqv_elt = 0;
5261 int src_eqv_volatile;
5262 int src_eqv_in_memory;
5263 int src_eqv_in_struct;
5264 int src_eqv_hash_code;
5265
5266 struct set *sets;
5267
5268 this_insn = insn;
5269 writes_memory = init;
5270
5271 /* Find all the SETs and CLOBBERs in this instruction.
5272 Record all the SETs in the array `set' and count them.
5273 Also determine whether there is a CLOBBER that invalidates
5274 all memory references, or all references at varying addresses. */
5275
5276 if (GET_CODE (x) == SET)
5277 {
5278 sets = (struct set *) alloca (sizeof (struct set));
5279 sets[0].rtl = x;
5280
5281 /* Ignore SETs that are unconditional jumps.
5282 They never need cse processing, so this does not hurt.
5283 The reason is not efficiency but rather
5284 so that we can test at the end for instructions
5285 that have been simplified to unconditional jumps
5286 and not be misled by unchanged instructions
5287 that were unconditional jumps to begin with. */
5288 if (SET_DEST (x) == pc_rtx
5289 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == LABEL_REF)
5290 ;
5291
5292 /* Don't count call-insns, (set (reg 0) (call ...)), as a set.
5293 The hard function value register is used only once, to copy to
5294 someplace else, so it isn't worth cse'ing (and on 80386 is unsafe)!
5295 Ensure we invalidate the destination register. On the 80386 no
5296 other code would invalidate it since it is a fixed_reg. */
5297
5298 else if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == CALL)
5299 {
5300 canon_reg (SET_SRC (x), insn);
5301 fold_rtx (SET_SRC (x), insn);
5302 invalidate (SET_DEST (x));
5303 }
5304 else
5305 n_sets = 1;
5306 }
5307 else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
5308 {
5309 register int lim = XVECLEN (x, 0);
5310
5311 sets = (struct set *) alloca (lim * sizeof (struct set));
5312
5313 /* Find all regs explicitly clobbered in this insn,
5314 and ensure they are not replaced with any other regs
5315 elsewhere in this insn.
5316 When a reg that is clobbered is also used for input,
5317 we should presume that that is for a reason,
5318 and we should not substitute some other register
5319 which is not supposed to be clobbered.
5320 Therefore, this loop cannot be merged into the one below
5321 because a CALL may precede a CLOBBER and refer to the
5322 value clobbered. We must not let a canonicalization do
5323 anything in that case. */
5324 for (i = 0; i < lim; i++)
5325 {
5326 register rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
5327 if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER
5328 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == REG
5329 || GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == SUBREG))
5330 invalidate (XEXP (y, 0));
5331 }
5332
5333 for (i = 0; i < lim; i++)
5334 {
5335 register rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
5336 if (GET_CODE (y) == SET)
5337 {
5338 /* As above, we ignore unconditional jumps and call-insns. */
5339 if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == CALL)
5340 {
5341 canon_reg (SET_SRC (y), insn);
5342 fold_rtx (SET_SRC (y), insn);
5343 invalidate (SET_DEST (y));
5344 }
5345 else if (SET_DEST (y) == pc_rtx
5346 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == LABEL_REF)
5347 ;
5348 else
5349 sets[n_sets++].rtl = y;
5350 }
5351 else if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
5352 {
5353 /* If we clobber memory, take note of that,
5354 and canon the address.
5355 This does nothing when a register is clobbered
5356 because we have already invalidated the reg. */
5357 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == MEM)
5358 {
5359 canon_reg (XEXP (y, 0), 0);
5360 note_mem_written (XEXP (y, 0), &writes_memory);
5361 }
5362 }
5363 else if (GET_CODE (y) == USE
5364 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == REG
5365 && REGNO (XEXP (y, 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
5366 canon_reg (y, 0);
5367 else if (GET_CODE (y) == CALL)
5368 {
5369 canon_reg (y, insn);
5370 fold_rtx (y, insn);
5371 }
5372 }
5373 }
5374 else if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
5375 {
5376 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == MEM)
5377 {
5378 canon_reg (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
5379 note_mem_written (XEXP (x, 0), &writes_memory);
5380 }
5381 }
5382
5383 /* Canonicalize a USE of a pseudo register or memory location. */
5384 else if (GET_CODE (x) == USE
5385 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == REG
5386 && REGNO (XEXP (x, 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
5387 canon_reg (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
5388 else if (GET_CODE (x) == CALL)
5389 {
5390 canon_reg (x, insn);
5391 fold_rtx (x, insn);
5392 }
5393
5394 if (n_sets == 1 && REG_NOTES (insn) != 0)
5395 {
5396 /* Store the equivalent value in SRC_EQV, if different. */
5397 rtx tem = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, 0);
5398
5399 if (tem && ! rtx_equal_p (XEXP (tem, 0), SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)))
5400 src_eqv = canon_reg (XEXP (tem, 0), 0);
5401 }
5402
5403 /* Canonicalize sources and addresses of destinations.
5404 We do this in a separate pass to avoid problems when a MATCH_DUP is
5405 present in the insn pattern. In that case, we want to ensure that
5406 we don't break the duplicate nature of the pattern. So we will replace
5407 both operands at the same time. Otherwise, we would fail to find an
5408 equivalent substitution in the loop calling validate_change below.
5409 (We also speed up that loop when a canonicalization was done since
5410 recog_memoized need not be called for just a canonicalization unless
5411 a pseudo register is being replaced by a hard reg of vice versa.)
5412
5413 We used to suppress canonicalization of DEST if it appears in SRC,
5414 but we don't do this any more.
5415
5416 ??? The way this code is written now, if we have a MATCH_DUP between
5417 two operands that are pseudos and we would want to canonicalize them
5418 to a hard register, we won't do that. The only time this would happen
5419 is if the hard reg was a fixed register, and this should be rare.
5420
5421 ??? This won't work if there is a MATCH_DUP between an input and an
5422 output, but these never worked and must be declared invalid. */
5423
5424 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
5425 {
5426 rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
5427 rtx src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
5428 rtx new = canon_reg (src, insn);
5429
5430 if (GET_CODE (new) == REG && GET_CODE (src) == REG
5431 && ((REGNO (new) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
5432 != (REGNO (src) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)))
5433 validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), new, 0);
5434 else
5435 SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl) = new;
5436
5437 if (GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT || GET_CODE (dest) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
5438 {
5439 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (dest, 1),
5440 canon_reg (XEXP (dest, 1), insn), 0);
5441 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (dest, 2),
5442 canon_reg (XEXP (dest, 2), insn), 0);
5443 }
5444
5445 while (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
5446 || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
5447 || GET_CODE (dest) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
5448 dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
5449
5450 if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
5451 canon_reg (dest, insn);
5452 }
5453
5454 /* Set sets[i].src_elt to the class each source belongs to.
5455 Detect assignments from or to volatile things
5456 and set set[i] to zero so they will be ignored
5457 in the rest of this function.
5458
5459 Nothing in this loop changes the hash table or the register chains. */
5460
5461 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
5462 {
5463 register rtx src, dest;
5464 register rtx src_folded;
5465 register struct table_elt *elt = 0, *p;
5466 enum machine_mode mode;
5467 rtx src_eqv_here;
5468 rtx src_const = 0;
5469 rtx src_related = 0;
5470 struct table_elt *src_const_elt = 0;
5471 int src_cost = 10000, src_eqv_cost = 10000, src_folded_cost = 10000;
5472 int src_related_cost = 10000, src_elt_cost = 10000;
5473 /* Set non-zero if we need to call force_const_mem on with the
5474 contents of src_folded before using it. */
5475 int src_folded_force_flag = 0;
5476
5477 dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
5478 src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
5479
5480 /* If SRC is a constant that has no machine mode,
5481 hash it with the destination's machine mode.
5482 This way we can keep different modes separate. */
5483
5484 mode = GET_MODE (src) == VOIDmode ? GET_MODE (dest) : GET_MODE (src);
5485 sets[i].mode = mode;
5486
5487 if (src_eqv)
5488 {
5489 enum machine_mode eqvmode = mode;
5490 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
5491 eqvmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0)));
5492 do_not_record = 0;
5493 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
5494 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
5495 src_eqv = fold_rtx (src_eqv, insn);
5496 src_eqv_hash_code = HASH (src_eqv, eqvmode);
5497
5498 /* Find the equivalence class for the equivalent expression. */
5499
5500 if (!do_not_record)
5501 src_eqv_elt = lookup (src_eqv, src_eqv_hash_code, eqvmode);
5502
5503 src_eqv_volatile = do_not_record;
5504 src_eqv_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
5505 src_eqv_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
5506 }
5507
5508 /* If this is a STRICT_LOW_PART assignment, src_eqv corresponds to the
5509 value of the INNER register, not the destination. So it is not
5510 a legal substitution for the source. But save it for later. */
5511 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
5512 src_eqv_here = 0;
5513 else
5514 src_eqv_here = src_eqv;
5515
5516 /* Simplify and foldable subexpressions in SRC. Then get the fully-
5517 simplified result, which may not necessarily be valid. */
5518 src_folded = fold_rtx (src, insn);
5519
5520 /* If storing a constant in a bitfield, pre-truncate the constant
5521 so we will be able to record it later. */
5522 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
5523 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
5524 {
5525 rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1);
5526
5527 if (GET_CODE (src) == CONST_INT
5528 && GET_CODE (width) == CONST_INT
5529 && INTVAL (width) < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
5530 && (INTVAL (src) & ((-1) << INTVAL (width))))
5531 src_folded = gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode,
5532 INTVAL (src) & ((1 << INTVAL (width)) - 1));
5533 }
5534
5535 /* Compute SRC's hash code, and also notice if it
5536 should not be recorded at all. In that case,
5537 prevent any further processing of this assignment. */
5538 do_not_record = 0;
5539 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
5540 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
5541
5542 sets[i].src = src;
5543 sets[i].src_hash_code = HASH (src, mode);
5544 sets[i].src_volatile = do_not_record;
5545 sets[i].src_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
5546 sets[i].src_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
5547
5548 /* If source is a perverse subreg (such as QI treated as an SI),
5549 treat it as volatile. It may do the work of an SI in one context
5550 where the extra bits are not being used, but cannot replace an SI
5551 in general. */
5552 if (GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG
5553 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src))
5554 > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)))))
5555 sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
5556
5557 /* Locate all possible equivalent forms for SRC. Try to replace
5558 SRC in the insn with each cheaper equivalent.
5559
5560 We have the following types of equivalents: SRC itself, a folded
5561 version, a value given in a REG_EQUAL note, or a value related
5562 to a constant.
5563
5564 Each of these equivalents may be part of an additional class
5565 of equivalents (if more than one is in the table, they must be in
5566 the same class; we check for this).
5567
5568 If the source is volatile, we don't do any table lookups.
5569
5570 We note any constant equivalent for possible later use in a
5571 REG_NOTE. */
5572
5573 if (!sets[i].src_volatile)
5574 elt = lookup (src, sets[i].src_hash_code, mode);
5575
5576 sets[i].src_elt = elt;
5577
5578 if (elt && src_eqv_here && src_eqv_elt)
5579 {
5580 if (elt->first_same_value != src_eqv_elt->first_same_value)
5581 {
5582 /* The REG_EQUAL is indicating that two formerly distinct
5583 classes are now equivalent. So merge them. */
5584 merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_eqv_elt);
5585 src_eqv_hash_code = HASH (src_eqv, elt->mode);
5586 src_eqv_elt = lookup (src_eqv, src_eqv_hash_code, elt->mode);
5587 }
5588
5589 src_eqv_here = 0;
5590 }
5591
5592 else if (src_eqv_elt)
5593 elt = src_eqv_elt;
5594
5595 /* Try to find a constant somewhere and record it in `src_const'.
5596 Record its table element, if any, in `src_const_elt'. Look in
5597 any known equivalences first. (If the constant is not in the
5598 table, also set `sets[i].src_const_hash_code'). */
5599 if (elt)
5600 for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
5601 if (p->is_const)
5602 {
5603 src_const = p->exp;
5604 src_const_elt = elt;
5605 break;
5606 }
5607
5608 if (src_const == 0
5609 && (CONSTANT_P (src_folded)
5610 /* Consider (minus (label_ref L1) (label_ref L2)) as
5611 "constant" here so we will record it. This allows us
5612 to fold switch statements when an ADDR_DIFF_VEC is used. */
5613 || (GET_CODE (src_folded) == MINUS
5614 && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_folded, 0)) == LABEL_REF
5615 && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_folded, 1)) == LABEL_REF)))
5616 src_const = src_folded, src_const_elt = elt;
5617 else if (src_const == 0 && src_eqv_here && CONSTANT_P (src_eqv_here))
5618 src_const = src_eqv_here, src_const_elt = src_eqv_elt;
5619
5620 /* If we don't know if the constant is in the table, get its
5621 hash code and look it up. */
5622 if (src_const && src_const_elt == 0)
5623 {
5624 sets[i].src_const_hash_code = HASH (src_const, mode);
5625 src_const_elt = lookup (src_const, sets[i].src_const_hash_code,
5626 mode);
5627 }
5628
5629 sets[i].src_const = src_const;
5630 sets[i].src_const_elt = src_const_elt;
5631
5632 /* If the constant and our source are both in the table, mark them as
5633 equivalent. Otherwise, if a constant is in the table but the source
5634 isn't, set ELT to it. */
5635 if (src_const_elt && elt
5636 && src_const_elt->first_same_value != elt->first_same_value)
5637 merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_const_elt);
5638 else if (src_const_elt && elt == 0)
5639 elt = src_const_elt;
5640
5641 /* See if there is a register linearly related to a constant
5642 equivalent of SRC. */
5643 if (src_const
5644 && (GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST
5645 || (src_const_elt && src_const_elt->related_value != 0)))
5646 {
5647 src_related = use_related_value (src_const, src_const_elt);
5648 if (src_related)
5649 {
5650 struct table_elt *src_related_elt
5651 = lookup (src_related, HASH (src_related, mode), mode);
5652 if (src_related_elt && elt)
5653 {
5654 if (elt->first_same_value
5655 != src_related_elt->first_same_value)
5656 /* This can occur when we previously saw a CONST
5657 involving a SYMBOL_REF and then see the SYMBOL_REF
5658 twice. Merge the involved classes. */
5659 merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_related_elt);
5660
5661 src_related = 0;
5662 src_related_elt = 0;
5663 }
5664 else if (src_related_elt && elt == 0)
5665 elt = src_related_elt;
5666 }
5667 }
5668
5669 /* Another possibility is that we have an AND with a constant in
5670 a mode narrower than a word. If so, it might have been generated
5671 as part of an "if" which would narrow the AND. If we already
5672 have done the AND in a wider mode, we can use a SUBREG of that
5673 value. */
5674
5675 if (flag_expensive_optimizations && ! src_related
5676 && GET_CODE (src) == AND && GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 1)) == CONST_INT
5677 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < UNITS_PER_WORD)
5678 {
5679 enum machine_mode tmode;
5680 rtx new_and = gen_rtx (AND, VOIDmode, 0, XEXP (src, 1));
5681
5682 for (tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode);
5683 GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD;
5684 tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
5685 {
5686 rtx inner = gen_lowpart_if_possible (tmode, XEXP (src, 0));
5687 struct table_elt *larger_elt;
5688
5689 if (inner)
5690 {
5691 PUT_MODE (new_and, tmode);
5692 XEXP (new_and, 0) = inner;
5693 larger_elt = lookup (new_and, HASH (new_and, tmode), tmode);
5694 if (larger_elt == 0)
5695 continue;
5696
5697 for (larger_elt = larger_elt->first_same_value;
5698 larger_elt; larger_elt = larger_elt->next_same_value)
5699 if (GET_CODE (larger_elt->exp) == REG)
5700 {
5701 src_related
5702 = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, larger_elt->exp);
5703 break;
5704 }
5705
5706 if (src_related)
5707 break;
5708 }
5709 }
5710 }
5711
5712 if (src == src_folded)
5713 src_folded = 0;
5714
5715 /* At this point, ELT, if non-zero, points to a class of expressions
5716 equivalent to the source of this SET and SRC, SRC_EQV, SRC_FOLDED,
5717 and SRC_RELATED, if non-zero, each contain additional equivalent
5718 expressions. Prune these latter expressions by deleting expressions
5719 already in the equivalence class.
5720
5721 Check for an equivalent identical to the destination. If found,
5722 this is the preferred equivalent since it will likely lead to
5723 elimination of the insn. Indicate this by placing it in
5724 `src_related'. */
5725
5726 if (elt) elt = elt->first_same_value;
5727 for (p = elt; p; p = p->next_same_value)
5728 {
5729 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (p->exp);
5730
5731 /* If the expression is not valid, ignore it. Then we do not
5732 have to check for validity below. In most cases, we can use
5733 `rtx_equal_p', since canonicalization has already been done. */
5734 if (code != REG && ! exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
5735 continue;
5736
5737 if (src && GET_CODE (src) == code && rtx_equal_p (src, p->exp))
5738 src = 0;
5739 else if (src_folded && GET_CODE (src_folded) == code
5740 && rtx_equal_p (src_folded, p->exp))
5741 src_folded = 0;
5742 else if (src_eqv_here && GET_CODE (src_eqv_here) == code
5743 && rtx_equal_p (src_eqv_here, p->exp))
5744 src_eqv_here = 0;
5745 else if (src_related && GET_CODE (src_related) == code
5746 && rtx_equal_p (src_related, p->exp))
5747 src_related = 0;
5748
5749 /* This is the same as the destination of the insns, we want
5750 to prefer it. Copy it to src_related. The code below will
5751 then give it a negative cost. */
5752 if (GET_CODE (dest) == code && rtx_equal_p (p->exp, dest))
5753 src_related = dest;
5754
5755 }
5756
5757 /* Find the cheapest valid equivalent, trying all the available
5758 possibilities. Prefer items not in the hash table to ones
5759 that are when they are equal cost. Note that we can never
5760 worsen an insn as the current contents will also succeed.
5761 If we find an equivalent identical to the destination, use it as best,
5762 since this insn will probably be eliminated in that case. */
5763 if (src)
5764 {
5765 if (rtx_equal_p (src, dest))
5766 src_cost = -1;
5767 else
5768 src_cost = COST (src);
5769 }
5770
5771 if (src_eqv_here)
5772 {
5773 if (rtx_equal_p (src_eqv_here, dest))
5774 src_eqv_cost = -1;
5775 else
5776 src_eqv_cost = COST (src_eqv_here);
5777 }
5778
5779 if (src_folded)
5780 {
5781 if (rtx_equal_p (src_folded, dest))
5782 src_folded_cost = -1;
5783 else
5784 src_folded_cost = COST (src_folded);
5785 }
5786
5787 if (src_related)
5788 {
5789 if (rtx_equal_p (src_related, dest))
5790 src_related_cost = -1;
5791 else
5792 src_related_cost = COST (src_related);
5793 }
5794
5795 /* If this was an indirect jump insn, a known label will really be
5796 cheaper even though it looks more expensive. */
5797 if (dest == pc_rtx && src_const && GET_CODE (src_const) == LABEL_REF)
5798 src_folded = src_const, src_folded_cost = -1;
5799
5800 /* Terminate loop when replacement made. This must terminate since
5801 the current contents will be tested and will always be valid. */
5802 while (1)
5803 {
5804 rtx trial;
5805
5806 /* Skip invalid entries. */
5807 while (elt && GET_CODE (elt->exp) != REG
5808 && ! exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
5809 elt = elt->next_same_value;
5810
5811 if (elt) src_elt_cost = elt->cost;
5812
5813 /* Find cheapest and skip it for the next time. For items
5814 of equal cost, use this order:
5815 src_folded, src, src_eqv, src_related and hash table entry. */
5816 if (src_folded_cost <= src_cost
5817 && src_folded_cost <= src_eqv_cost
5818 && src_folded_cost <= src_related_cost
5819 && src_folded_cost <= src_elt_cost)
5820 {
5821 trial = src_folded, src_folded_cost = 10000;
5822 if (src_folded_force_flag)
5823 trial = force_const_mem (mode, trial);
5824 }
5825 else if (src_cost <= src_eqv_cost
5826 && src_cost <= src_related_cost
5827 && src_cost <= src_elt_cost)
5828 trial = src, src_cost = 10000;
5829 else if (src_eqv_cost <= src_related_cost
5830 && src_eqv_cost <= src_elt_cost)
5831 trial = src_eqv_here, src_eqv_cost = 10000;
5832 else if (src_related_cost <= src_elt_cost)
5833 trial = src_related, src_related_cost = 10000;
5834 else
5835 {
5836 trial = copy_rtx (elt->exp);
5837 elt = elt->next_same_value;
5838 src_elt_cost = 10000;
5839 }
5840
5841 /* We don't normally have an insn matching (set (pc) (pc)), so
5842 check for this separately here. We will delete such an
5843 insn below.
5844
5845 Tablejump insns contain a USE of the table, so simply replacing
5846 the operand with the constant won't match. This is simply an
5847 unconditional branch, however, and is therefore valid. Just
5848 insert the substitution here and we will delete and re-emit
5849 the insn later. */
5850
5851 if (n_sets == 1 && dest == pc_rtx
5852 && (trial == pc_rtx
5853 || (GET_CODE (trial) == LABEL_REF
5854 && ! condjump_p (insn))))
5855 {
5856 /* If TRIAL is a label in front of a jump table, we are
5857 really falling through the switch (this is how casesi
5858 insns work), so we must branch around the table. */
5859 if (GET_CODE (trial) == CODE_LABEL
5860 && NEXT_INSN (trial) != 0
5861 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (trial)) == JUMP_INSN
5862 && (GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (trial))) == ADDR_DIFF_VEC
5863 || GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (trial))) == ADDR_VEC))
5864
5865 trial = gen_rtx (LABEL_REF, Pmode, get_label_after (trial));
5866
5867 SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl) = trial;
5868 break;
5869 }
5870
5871 /* Look for a substitution that makes a valid insn. */
5872 else if (validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), trial, 0))
5873 {
5874 SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl) = canon_reg (SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), insn);
5875 break;
5876 }
5877
5878 /* If we previously found constant pool entries for
5879 constants and this is a constant, try making a
5880 pool entry. Put it in src_folded unless we already have done
5881 this since that is where it likely came from. */
5882
5883 else if (constant_pool_entries_cost
5884 && CONSTANT_P (trial)
5885 && (src_folded == 0 || GET_CODE (src_folded) != MEM)
5886 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_CC)
5887 {
5888 src_folded_force_flag = 1;
5889 src_folded = trial;
5890 src_folded_cost = constant_pool_entries_cost;
5891 }
5892 }
5893
5894 src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
5895
5896 /* In general, it is good to have a SET with SET_SRC == SET_DEST.
5897 However, there is an important exception: If both are registers
5898 that are not the head of their equivalence class, replace SET_SRC
5899 with the head of the class. If we do not do this, we will have
5900 both registers live over a portion of the basic block. This way,
5901 their lifetimes will likely abut instead of overlapping. */
5902 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG
5903 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (dest))
5904 && qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]] == GET_MODE (dest)
5905 && qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]] != REGNO (dest)
5906 && GET_CODE (src) == REG && REGNO (src) == REGNO (dest)
5907 /* Don't do this if the original insn had a hard reg as
5908 SET_SRC. */
5909 && (GET_CODE (sets[i].src) != REG
5910 || REGNO (sets[i].src) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
5911 /* We can't call canon_reg here because it won't do anything if
5912 SRC is a hard register. */
5913 {
5914 int first = qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (src)]];
5915
5916 src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl)
5917 = first >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? regno_reg_rtx[first]
5918 : gen_rtx (REG, GET_MODE (src), first);
5919
5920 /* If we had a constant that is cheaper than what we are now
5921 setting SRC to, use that constant. We ignored it when we
5922 thought we could make this into a no-op. */
5923 if (src_const && COST (src_const) < COST (src)
5924 && validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), src_const, 0))
5925 src = src_const;
5926 }
5927
5928 /* If we made a change, recompute SRC values. */
5929 if (src != sets[i].src)
5930 {
5931 do_not_record = 0;
5932 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
5933 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
5934 sets[i].src = src;
5935 sets[i].src_hash_code = HASH (src, mode);
5936 sets[i].src_volatile = do_not_record;
5937 sets[i].src_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
5938 sets[i].src_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
5939 sets[i].src_elt = lookup (src, sets[i].src_hash_code, mode);
5940 }
5941
5942 /* If this is a single SET, we are setting a register, and we have an
5943 equivalent constant, we want to add a REG_NOTE. We don't want
5944 to write a REG_EQUAL note for a constant pseudo since verifying that
5945 that pseudo hasn't been eliminated is a pain. Such a note also
5946 won't help anything. */
5947 if (n_sets == 1 && src_const && GET_CODE (dest) == REG
5948 && GET_CODE (src_const) != REG)
5949 {
5950 rtx tem = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, 0);
5951
5952 /* Record the actual constant value in a REG_EQUAL note, making
5953 a new one if one does not already exist. */
5954 if (tem)
5955 XEXP (tem, 0) = src_const;
5956 else
5957 REG_NOTES (insn) = gen_rtx (EXPR_LIST, REG_EQUAL,
5958 src_const, REG_NOTES (insn));
5959
5960 /* If storing a constant value in a register that
5961 previously held the constant value 0,
5962 record this fact with a REG_WAS_0 note on this insn.
5963
5964 Note that the *register* is required to have previously held 0,
5965 not just any register in the quantity and we must point to the
5966 insn that set that register to zero.
5967
5968 Rather than track each register individually, we just see if
5969 the last set for this quantity was for this register. */
5970
5971 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (dest))
5972 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]] == const0_rtx)
5973 {
5974 /* See if we previously had a REG_WAS_0 note. */
5975 rtx note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_WAS_0, 0);
5976 rtx const_insn = qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]];
5977
5978 if ((tem = single_set (const_insn)) != 0
5979 && rtx_equal_p (SET_DEST (tem), dest))
5980 {
5981 if (note)
5982 XEXP (note, 0) = const_insn;
5983 else
5984 REG_NOTES (insn) = gen_rtx (INSN_LIST, REG_WAS_0,
5985 const_insn, REG_NOTES (insn));
5986 }
5987 }
5988 }
5989
5990 /* Now deal with the destination. */
5991 do_not_record = 0;
5992 sets[i].inner_dest_loc = &SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
5993
5994 /* Look within any SIGN_EXTRACT or ZERO_EXTRACT
5995 to the MEM or REG within it. */
5996 while (GET_CODE (dest) == SIGN_EXTRACT
5997 || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
5998 || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
5999 || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6000 {
6001 sets[i].inner_dest_loc = &XEXP (dest, 0);
6002 dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
6003 }
6004
6005 sets[i].inner_dest = dest;
6006
6007 if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
6008 {
6009 dest = fold_rtx (dest, insn);
6010
6011 /* Decide whether we invalidate everything in memory,
6012 or just things at non-fixed places.
6013 Writing a large aggregate must invalidate everything
6014 because we don't know how long it is. */
6015 note_mem_written (dest, &writes_memory);
6016 }
6017
6018 /* Compute the hash code of the destination now,
6019 before the effects of this instruction are recorded,
6020 since the register values used in the address computation
6021 are those before this instruction. */
6022 sets[i].dest_hash_code = HASH (dest, mode);
6023
6024 /* Don't enter a bit-field in the hash table
6025 because the value in it after the store
6026 may not equal what was stored, due to truncation. */
6027
6028 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
6029 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
6030 {
6031 rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1);
6032
6033 if (src_const != 0 && GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST_INT
6034 && GET_CODE (width) == CONST_INT
6035 && INTVAL (width) < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
6036 && ! (INTVAL (src_const) & ((-1) << INTVAL (width))))
6037 /* Exception: if the value is constant,
6038 and it won't be truncated, record it. */
6039 ;
6040 else
6041 {
6042 /* This is chosen so that the destination will be invalidated
6043 but no new value will be recorded.
6044 We must invalidate because sometimes constant
6045 values can be recorded for bitfields. */
6046 sets[i].src_elt = 0;
6047 sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
6048 src_eqv = 0;
6049 src_eqv_elt = 0;
6050 }
6051 }
6052
6053 /* If only one set in a JUMP_INSN and it is now a no-op, we can delete
6054 the insn. */
6055 else if (n_sets == 1 && dest == pc_rtx && src == pc_rtx)
6056 {
6057 PUT_CODE (insn, NOTE);
6058 NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) = NOTE_INSN_DELETED;
6059 NOTE_SOURCE_FILE (insn) = 0;
6060 cse_jumps_altered = 1;
6061 /* One less use of the label this insn used to jump to. */
6062 --LABEL_NUSES (JUMP_LABEL (insn));
6063 /* No more processing for this set. */
6064 sets[i].rtl = 0;
6065 }
6066
6067 /* If this SET is now setting PC to a label, we know it used to
6068 be a conditional or computed branch. So we see if we can follow
6069 it. If it was a computed branch, delete it and re-emit. */
6070 else if (dest == pc_rtx && GET_CODE (src) == LABEL_REF)
6071 {
6072 rtx p;
6073
6074 /* If this is not in the format for a simple branch and
6075 we are the only SET in it, re-emit it. */
6076 if (! simplejump_p (insn) && n_sets == 1)
6077 {
6078 rtx new = emit_jump_insn_before (gen_jump (XEXP (src, 0)), insn);
6079 JUMP_LABEL (new) = XEXP (src, 0);
6080 LABEL_NUSES (XEXP (src, 0))++;
6081 delete_insn (insn);
6082 insn = new;
6083 }
6084
6085 /* Now that we've converted this jump to an unconditional jump,
6086 there is dead code after it. Delete the dead code until we
6087 reach a BARRIER, the end of the function, or a label. Do
6088 not delete NOTEs except for NOTE_INSN_DELETED since later
6089 phases assume these notes are retained. */
6090
6091 p = insn;
6092
6093 while (NEXT_INSN (p) != 0
6094 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) != BARRIER
6095 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) != CODE_LABEL)
6096 {
6097 if (GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) != NOTE
6098 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (NEXT_INSN (p)) == NOTE_INSN_DELETED)
6099 delete_insn (NEXT_INSN (p));
6100 else
6101 p = NEXT_INSN (p);
6102 }
6103
6104 /* If we don't have a BARRIER immediately after INSN, put one there.
6105 Much code assumes that there are no NOTEs between a JUMP_INSN and
6106 BARRIER. */
6107
6108 if (NEXT_INSN (insn) == 0
6109 || GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (insn)) != BARRIER)
6110 emit_barrier_after (insn);
6111
6112 /* We might have two BARRIERs separated by notes. Delete the second
6113 one if so. */
6114
6115 if (p != insn && NEXT_INSN (p) != 0
6116 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) == BARRIER)
6117 delete_insn (NEXT_INSN (p));
6118
6119 cse_jumps_altered = 1;
6120 sets[i].rtl = 0;
6121 }
6122
6123 /* If destination is volatile, invalidate it and then do no further
6124 processing for this assignment. */
6125
6126 else if (do_not_record)
6127 {
6128 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
6129 || GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
6130 invalidate (dest);
6131 sets[i].rtl = 0;
6132 }
6133
6134 if (sets[i].rtl != 0 && dest != SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl))
6135 sets[i].dest_hash_code = HASH (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), mode);
6136
6137 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
6138 /* If setting CC0, record what it was set to, or a constant, if it
6139 is equivalent to a constant. If it is being set to a floating-point
6140 value, make a COMPARE with the appropriate constant of 0. If we
6141 don't do this, later code can interpret this as a test against
6142 const0_rtx, which can cause problems if we try to put it into an
6143 insn as a floating-point operand. */
6144 if (dest == cc0_rtx)
6145 {
6146 this_insn_cc0 = src_const && mode != VOIDmode ? src_const : src;
6147 this_insn_cc0_mode = mode;
6148 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT)
6149 this_insn_cc0 = gen_rtx (COMPARE, VOIDmode, this_insn_cc0,
6150 CONST0_RTX (mode));
6151 }
6152 #endif
6153 }
6154
6155 /* Now enter all non-volatile source expressions in the hash table
6156 if they are not already present.
6157 Record their equivalence classes in src_elt.
6158 This way we can insert the corresponding destinations into
6159 the same classes even if the actual sources are no longer in them
6160 (having been invalidated). */
6161
6162 if (src_eqv && src_eqv_elt == 0 && sets[0].rtl != 0 && ! src_eqv_volatile
6163 && ! rtx_equal_p (src_eqv, SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)))
6164 {
6165 register struct table_elt *elt;
6166 register struct table_elt *classp = sets[0].src_elt;
6167 rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
6168 enum machine_mode eqvmode = GET_MODE (dest);
6169
6170 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6171 {
6172 eqvmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0)));
6173 classp = 0;
6174 }
6175 if (insert_regs (src_eqv, classp, 0))
6176 src_eqv_hash_code = HASH (src_eqv, eqvmode);
6177 elt = insert (src_eqv, classp, src_eqv_hash_code, eqvmode);
6178 elt->in_memory = src_eqv_in_memory;
6179 elt->in_struct = src_eqv_in_struct;
6180 src_eqv_elt = elt;
6181 }
6182
6183 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
6184 if (sets[i].rtl && ! sets[i].src_volatile
6185 && ! rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)))
6186 {
6187 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6188 {
6189 /* REG_EQUAL in setting a STRICT_LOW_PART
6190 gives an equivalent for the entire destination register,
6191 not just for the subreg being stored in now.
6192 This is a more interesting equivalence, so we arrange later
6193 to treat the entire reg as the destination. */
6194 sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
6195 sets[i].src_hash_code = src_eqv_hash_code;
6196 }
6197 else
6198 {
6199 /* Insert source and constant equivalent into hash table, if not
6200 already present. */
6201 register struct table_elt *classp = src_eqv_elt;
6202 register rtx src = sets[i].src;
6203 register rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
6204 enum machine_mode mode
6205 = GET_MODE (src) == VOIDmode ? GET_MODE (dest) : GET_MODE (src);
6206
6207 if (sets[i].src_elt == 0)
6208 {
6209 register struct table_elt *elt;
6210
6211 /* Note that these insert_regs calls cannot remove
6212 any of the src_elt's, because they would have failed to
6213 match if not still valid. */
6214 if (insert_regs (src, classp, 0))
6215 sets[i].src_hash_code = HASH (src, mode);
6216 elt = insert (src, classp, sets[i].src_hash_code, mode);
6217 elt->in_memory = sets[i].src_in_memory;
6218 elt->in_struct = sets[i].src_in_struct;
6219 sets[i].src_elt = classp = elt;
6220 }
6221
6222 if (sets[i].src_const && sets[i].src_const_elt == 0
6223 && src != sets[i].src_const
6224 && ! rtx_equal_p (sets[i].src_const, src))
6225 sets[i].src_elt = insert (sets[i].src_const, classp,
6226 sets[i].src_const_hash_code, mode);
6227 }
6228 }
6229 else if (sets[i].src_elt == 0)
6230 /* If we did not insert the source into the hash table (e.g., it was
6231 volatile), note the equivalence class for the REG_EQUAL value, if any,
6232 so that the destination goes into that class. */
6233 sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
6234
6235 invalidate_from_clobbers (&writes_memory, x);
6236 /* Memory, and some registers, are invalidate by subroutine calls. */
6237 if (GET_CODE (insn) == CALL_INSN)
6238 {
6239 static struct write_data everything = {0, 1, 1, 1};
6240 invalidate_memory (&everything);
6241 invalidate_for_call ();
6242 }
6243
6244 /* Now invalidate everything set by this instruction.
6245 If a SUBREG or other funny destination is being set,
6246 sets[i].rtl is still nonzero, so here we invalidate the reg
6247 a part of which is being set. */
6248
6249 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
6250 if (sets[i].rtl)
6251 {
6252 register rtx dest = sets[i].inner_dest;
6253
6254 /* Needed for registers to remove the register from its
6255 previous quantity's chain.
6256 Needed for memory if this is a nonvarying address, unless
6257 we have just done an invalidate_memory that covers even those. */
6258 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
6259 || (! writes_memory.all && ! cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (dest)))
6260 invalidate (dest);
6261 }
6262
6263 /* Make sure registers mentioned in destinations
6264 are safe for use in an expression to be inserted.
6265 This removes from the hash table
6266 any invalid entry that refers to one of these registers.
6267
6268 We don't care about the return value from mention_regs because
6269 we are going to hash the SET_DEST values unconditionally. */
6270
6271 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
6272 if (sets[i].rtl && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) != REG)
6273 mention_regs (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl));
6274
6275 /* We may have just removed some of the src_elt's from the hash table.
6276 So replace each one with the current head of the same class. */
6277
6278 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
6279 if (sets[i].rtl)
6280 {
6281 if (sets[i].src_elt && sets[i].src_elt->first_same_value == 0)
6282 /* If elt was removed, find current head of same class,
6283 or 0 if nothing remains of that class. */
6284 {
6285 register struct table_elt *elt = sets[i].src_elt;
6286
6287 while (elt && elt->prev_same_value)
6288 elt = elt->prev_same_value;
6289
6290 while (elt && elt->first_same_value == 0)
6291 elt = elt->next_same_value;
6292 sets[i].src_elt = elt ? elt->first_same_value : 0;
6293 }
6294 }
6295
6296 /* Now insert the destinations into their equivalence classes. */
6297
6298 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
6299 if (sets[i].rtl)
6300 {
6301 register rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
6302 register struct table_elt *elt;
6303
6304 /* Don't record value if we are not supposed to risk allocating
6305 floating-point values in registers that might be wider than
6306 memory. */
6307 if ((flag_float_store
6308 && GET_CODE (dest) == MEM
6309 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (dest)) == MODE_FLOAT)
6310 /* Don't record values of destinations set inside a libcall block
6311 since we might delete the libcall. Things should have been set
6312 up so we won't want to reuse such a value, but we play it safe
6313 here. */
6314 || in_libcall_block
6315 /* If we didn't put a REG_EQUAL value or a source into the hash
6316 table, there is no point is recording DEST. */
6317 || sets[i].src_elt == 0)
6318 continue;
6319
6320 /* STRICT_LOW_PART isn't part of the value BEING set,
6321 and neither is the SUBREG inside it.
6322 Note that in this case SETS[I].SRC_ELT is really SRC_EQV_ELT. */
6323 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6324 dest = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0));
6325
6326 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG)
6327 /* Registers must also be inserted into chains for quantities. */
6328 if (insert_regs (dest, sets[i].src_elt, 1))
6329 /* If `insert_regs' changes something, the hash code must be
6330 recalculated. */
6331 sets[i].dest_hash_code = HASH (dest, GET_MODE (dest));
6332
6333 elt = insert (dest, sets[i].src_elt,
6334 sets[i].dest_hash_code, GET_MODE (dest));
6335 elt->in_memory = GET_CODE (sets[i].inner_dest) == MEM;
6336 if (elt->in_memory)
6337 {
6338 /* This implicitly assumes a whole struct
6339 need not have MEM_IN_STRUCT_P.
6340 But a whole struct is *supposed* to have MEM_IN_STRUCT_P. */
6341 elt->in_struct = (MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (sets[i].inner_dest)
6342 || sets[i].inner_dest != SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl));
6343 }
6344
6345 /* If we have (set (subreg:m1 (reg:m2 foo) 0) (bar:m1)), M1 is no
6346 narrower than M2, and both M1 and M2 are the same number of words,
6347 we are also doing (set (reg:m2 foo) (subreg:m2 (bar:m1) 0)) so
6348 make that equivalence as well.
6349
6350 However, BAR may have equivalences for which gen_lowpart_if_possible
6351 will produce a simpler value than gen_lowpart_if_possible applied to
6352 BAR (e.g., if BAR was ZERO_EXTENDed from M2), so we will scan all
6353 BAR's equivalences. If we don't get a simplified form, make
6354 the SUBREG. It will not be used in an equivalence, but will
6355 cause two similar assignments to be detected.
6356
6357 Note the loop below will find SUBREG_REG (DEST) since we have
6358 already entered SRC and DEST of the SET in the table. */
6359
6360 if (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
6361 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest))) / UNITS_PER_WORD
6362 == GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest)) / UNITS_PER_WORD)
6363 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest))
6364 >= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest))))
6365 && sets[i].src_elt != 0)
6366 {
6367 enum machine_mode new_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest));
6368 struct table_elt *elt, *classp = 0;
6369
6370 for (elt = sets[i].src_elt->first_same_value; elt;
6371 elt = elt->next_same_value)
6372 {
6373 rtx new_src = 0;
6374 int src_hash;
6375 struct table_elt *src_elt;
6376
6377 /* Ignore invalid entries. */
6378 if (GET_CODE (elt->exp) != REG
6379 && ! exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
6380 continue;
6381
6382 new_src = gen_lowpart_if_possible (new_mode, elt->exp);
6383 if (new_src == 0)
6384 new_src = gen_rtx (SUBREG, new_mode, elt->exp, 0);
6385
6386 src_hash = HASH (new_src, new_mode);
6387 src_elt = lookup (new_src, src_hash, new_mode);
6388
6389 /* Put the new source in the hash table is if isn't
6390 already. */
6391 if (src_elt == 0)
6392 {
6393 if (insert_regs (new_src, classp, 0))
6394 src_hash = HASH (new_src, new_mode);
6395 src_elt = insert (new_src, classp, src_hash, new_mode);
6396 src_elt->in_memory = elt->in_memory;
6397 src_elt->in_struct = elt->in_struct;
6398 }
6399 else if (classp && classp != src_elt->first_same_value)
6400 /* Show that two things that we've seen before are
6401 actually the same. */
6402 merge_equiv_classes (src_elt, classp);
6403
6404 classp = src_elt->first_same_value;
6405 }
6406 }
6407 }
6408
6409 /* Special handling for (set REG0 REG1)
6410 where REG0 is the "cheapest", cheaper than REG1.
6411 After cse, REG1 will probably not be used in the sequel,
6412 so (if easily done) change this insn to (set REG1 REG0) and
6413 replace REG1 with REG0 in the previous insn that computed their value.
6414 Then REG1 will become a dead store and won't cloud the situation
6415 for later optimizations.
6416
6417 Do not make this change if REG1 is a hard register, because it will
6418 then be used in the sequel and we may be changing a two-operand insn
6419 into a three-operand insn.
6420
6421 Also do not do this if we are operating on a copy of INSN. */
6422
6423 if (n_sets == 1 && sets[0].rtl && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)) == REG
6424 && NEXT_INSN (PREV_INSN (insn)) == insn
6425 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)) == REG
6426 && REGNO (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
6427 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)))
6428 && (qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl))]]
6429 == REGNO (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl))))
6430 {
6431 rtx prev = PREV_INSN (insn);
6432 while (prev && GET_CODE (prev) == NOTE)
6433 prev = PREV_INSN (prev);
6434
6435 if (prev && GET_CODE (prev) == INSN && GET_CODE (PATTERN (prev)) == SET
6436 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (prev)) == SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl))
6437 {
6438 rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
6439 rtx note = find_reg_note (prev, REG_EQUIV, 0);
6440
6441 validate_change (prev, & SET_DEST (PATTERN (prev)), dest, 1);
6442 validate_change (insn, & SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl),
6443 SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl), 1);
6444 validate_change (insn, & SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl), dest, 1);
6445 apply_change_group ();
6446
6447 /* If REG1 was equivalent to a constant, REG0 is not. */
6448 if (note)
6449 PUT_REG_NOTE_KIND (note, REG_EQUAL);
6450
6451 /* If there was a REG_WAS_0 note on PREV, remove it. Move
6452 any REG_WAS_0 note on INSN to PREV. */
6453 note = find_reg_note (prev, REG_WAS_0, 0);
6454 if (note)
6455 remove_note (prev, note);
6456
6457 note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_WAS_0, 0);
6458 if (note)
6459 {
6460 remove_note (insn, note);
6461 XEXP (note, 1) = REG_NOTES (prev);
6462 REG_NOTES (prev) = note;
6463 }
6464 }
6465 }
6466
6467 /* If this is a conditional jump insn, record any known equivalences due to
6468 the condition being tested. */
6469
6470 last_jump_equiv_class = 0;
6471 if (GET_CODE (insn) == JUMP_INSN
6472 && n_sets == 1 && GET_CODE (x) == SET
6473 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == IF_THEN_ELSE)
6474 record_jump_equiv (insn, 0);
6475
6476 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
6477 /* If the previous insn set CC0 and this insn no longer references CC0,
6478 delete the previous insn. Here we use the fact that nothing expects CC0
6479 to be valid over an insn, which is true until the final pass. */
6480 if (prev_insn && GET_CODE (prev_insn) == INSN
6481 && (tem = single_set (prev_insn)) != 0
6482 && SET_DEST (tem) == cc0_rtx
6483 && ! reg_mentioned_p (cc0_rtx, x))
6484 {
6485 PUT_CODE (prev_insn, NOTE);
6486 NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (prev_insn) = NOTE_INSN_DELETED;
6487 NOTE_SOURCE_FILE (prev_insn) = 0;
6488 }
6489
6490 prev_insn_cc0 = this_insn_cc0;
6491 prev_insn_cc0_mode = this_insn_cc0_mode;
6492 #endif
6493
6494 prev_insn = insn;
6495 }
6496 \f
6497 /* Store 1 in *WRITES_PTR for those categories of memory ref
6498 that must be invalidated when the expression WRITTEN is stored in.
6499 If WRITTEN is null, say everything must be invalidated. */
6500
6501 static void
6502 note_mem_written (written, writes_ptr)
6503 rtx written;
6504 struct write_data *writes_ptr;
6505 {
6506 static struct write_data everything = {0, 1, 1, 1};
6507
6508 if (written == 0)
6509 *writes_ptr = everything;
6510 else if (GET_CODE (written) == MEM)
6511 {
6512 /* Pushing or popping the stack invalidates just the stack pointer. */
6513 rtx addr = XEXP (written, 0);
6514 if ((GET_CODE (addr) == PRE_DEC || GET_CODE (addr) == PRE_INC
6515 || GET_CODE (addr) == POST_DEC || GET_CODE (addr) == POST_INC)
6516 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == REG
6517 && REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0)) == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM)
6518 {
6519 writes_ptr->sp = 1;
6520 return;
6521 }
6522 else if (GET_MODE (written) == BLKmode)
6523 *writes_ptr = everything;
6524 else if (cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (written))
6525 {
6526 /* A varying address that is a sum indicates an array element,
6527 and that's just as good as a structure element
6528 in implying that we need not invalidate scalar variables. */
6529 if (!(MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (written)
6530 || GET_CODE (XEXP (written, 0)) == PLUS))
6531 writes_ptr->all = 1;
6532 writes_ptr->nonscalar = 1;
6533 }
6534 writes_ptr->var = 1;
6535 }
6536 }
6537
6538 /* Perform invalidation on the basis of everything about an insn
6539 except for invalidating the actual places that are SET in it.
6540 This includes the places CLOBBERed, and anything that might
6541 alias with something that is SET or CLOBBERed.
6542
6543 W points to the writes_memory for this insn, a struct write_data
6544 saying which kinds of memory references must be invalidated.
6545 X is the pattern of the insn. */
6546
6547 static void
6548 invalidate_from_clobbers (w, x)
6549 struct write_data *w;
6550 rtx x;
6551 {
6552 /* If W->var is not set, W specifies no action.
6553 If W->all is set, this step gets all memory refs
6554 so they can be ignored in the rest of this function. */
6555 if (w->var)
6556 invalidate_memory (w);
6557
6558 if (w->sp)
6559 {
6560 if (reg_tick[STACK_POINTER_REGNUM] >= 0)
6561 reg_tick[STACK_POINTER_REGNUM]++;
6562
6563 /* This should be *very* rare. */
6564 if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM))
6565 invalidate (stack_pointer_rtx);
6566 }
6567
6568 if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
6569 {
6570 rtx ref = XEXP (x, 0);
6571 if (ref
6572 && (GET_CODE (ref) == REG || GET_CODE (ref) == SUBREG
6573 || (GET_CODE (ref) == MEM && ! w->all)))
6574 invalidate (ref);
6575 }
6576 else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
6577 {
6578 register int i;
6579 for (i = XVECLEN (x, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
6580 {
6581 register rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
6582 if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
6583 {
6584 rtx ref = XEXP (y, 0);
6585 if (ref
6586 &&(GET_CODE (ref) == REG || GET_CODE (ref) == SUBREG
6587 || (GET_CODE (ref) == MEM && !w->all)))
6588 invalidate (ref);
6589 }
6590 }
6591 }
6592 }
6593 \f
6594 /* Process X, part of the REG_NOTES of an insn. Look at any REG_EQUAL notes
6595 and replace any registers in them with either an equivalent constant
6596 or the canonical form of the register. If we are inside an address,
6597 only do this if the address remains valid.
6598
6599 OBJECT is 0 except when within a MEM in which case it is the MEM.
6600
6601 Return the replacement for X. */
6602
6603 static rtx
6604 cse_process_notes (x, object)
6605 rtx x;
6606 rtx object;
6607 {
6608 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
6609 char *fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
6610 int qty;
6611 int i;
6612
6613 switch (code)
6614 {
6615 case CONST_INT:
6616 case CONST:
6617 case SYMBOL_REF:
6618 case LABEL_REF:
6619 case CONST_DOUBLE:
6620 case PC:
6621 case CC0:
6622 case LO_SUM:
6623 return x;
6624
6625 case MEM:
6626 XEXP (x, 0) = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), x);
6627 return x;
6628
6629 case EXPR_LIST:
6630 case INSN_LIST:
6631 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (x) == REG_EQUAL)
6632 XEXP (x, 0) = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
6633 if (XEXP (x, 1))
6634 XEXP (x, 1) = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 1), 0);
6635 return x;
6636
6637 case SIGN_EXTEND:
6638 case ZERO_EXTEND:
6639 {
6640 rtx new = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), object);
6641 /* We don't substitute VOIDmode constants into these rtx,
6642 since they would impede folding. */
6643 if (GET_MODE (new) != VOIDmode)
6644 validate_change (object, &XEXP (x, 0), new, 0);
6645 return x;
6646 }
6647
6648 case REG:
6649 i = reg_qty[REGNO (x)];
6650
6651 /* Return a constant or a constant register. */
6652 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x))
6653 && qty_const[i] != 0
6654 && (CONSTANT_P (qty_const[i])
6655 || GET_CODE (qty_const[i]) == REG))
6656 {
6657 rtx new = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (x), qty_const[i]);
6658 if (new)
6659 return new;
6660 }
6661
6662 /* Otherwise, canonicalize this register. */
6663 return canon_reg (x, 0);
6664 }
6665
6666 for (i = 0; i < GET_RTX_LENGTH (code); i++)
6667 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
6668 validate_change (object, &XEXP (x, i),
6669 cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, i), object), 0);
6670
6671 return x;
6672 }
6673 \f
6674 /* Find common subexpressions between the end test of a loop and the beginning
6675 of the loop. LOOP_START is the CODE_LABEL at the start of a loop.
6676
6677 Often we have a loop where an expression in the exit test is used
6678 in the body of the loop. For example "while (*p) *q++ = *p++;".
6679 Because of the way we duplicate the loop exit test in front of the loop,
6680 however, we don't detect that common subexpression. This will be caught
6681 when global cse is implemented, but this is a quite common case.
6682
6683 This function handles the most common cases of these common expressions.
6684 It is called after we have processed the basic block ending with the
6685 NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END note that ends a loop and the previous JUMP_INSN
6686 jumps to a label used only once. */
6687
6688 static void
6689 cse_around_loop (loop_start)
6690 rtx loop_start;
6691 {
6692 rtx insn;
6693 int i;
6694 struct table_elt *p;
6695
6696 /* If the jump at the end of the loop doesn't go to the start, we don't
6697 do anything. */
6698 for (insn = PREV_INSN (loop_start);
6699 insn && (GET_CODE (insn) == NOTE && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) >= 0);
6700 insn = PREV_INSN (insn))
6701 ;
6702
6703 if (insn == 0
6704 || GET_CODE (insn) != NOTE
6705 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) != NOTE_INSN_LOOP_BEG)
6706 return;
6707
6708 /* If the last insn of the loop (the end test) was an NE comparison,
6709 we will interpret it as an EQ comparison, since we fell through
6710 the loop. Any equivalances resulting from that comparison are
6711 therefore not valid and must be invalidated. */
6712 if (last_jump_equiv_class)
6713 for (p = last_jump_equiv_class->first_same_value; p;
6714 p = p->next_same_value)
6715 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == MEM || GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG
6716 || GET_CODE (p->exp) == SUBREG)
6717 invalidate (p->exp);
6718
6719 /* Process insns starting after LOOP_START until we hit a CALL_INSN or
6720 a CODE_LABEL (we could handle a CALL_INSN, but it isn't worth it).
6721
6722 The only thing we do with SET_DEST is invalidate entries, so we
6723 can safely process each SET in order. It is slightly less efficient
6724 to do so, but we only want to handle the most common cases. */
6725
6726 for (insn = NEXT_INSN (loop_start);
6727 GET_CODE (insn) != CALL_INSN && GET_CODE (insn) != CODE_LABEL
6728 && ! (GET_CODE (insn) == NOTE
6729 && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END);
6730 insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
6731 {
6732 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) == 'i'
6733 && (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET
6734 || GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == CLOBBER))
6735 cse_set_around_loop (PATTERN (insn), insn, loop_start);
6736 else if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) == 'i'
6737 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL)
6738 for (i = XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
6739 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i)) == SET
6740 || GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i)) == CLOBBER)
6741 cse_set_around_loop (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i), insn,
6742 loop_start);
6743 }
6744 }
6745 \f
6746 /* Variable used for communications between the next two routines. */
6747
6748 static struct write_data skipped_writes_memory;
6749
6750 /* Process one SET of an insn that was skipped. We ignore CLOBBERs
6751 since they are done elsewhere. This function is called via note_stores. */
6752
6753 static void
6754 invalidate_skipped_set (dest, set)
6755 rtx set;
6756 rtx dest;
6757 {
6758 if (GET_CODE (set) == CLOBBER
6759 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
6760 || dest == cc0_rtx
6761 #endif
6762 || dest == pc_rtx)
6763 return;
6764
6765 if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
6766 note_mem_written (dest, &skipped_writes_memory);
6767
6768 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
6769 || (! skipped_writes_memory.all && ! cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (dest)))
6770 invalidate (dest);
6771 }
6772
6773 /* Invalidate all insns from START up to the end of the function or the
6774 next label. This called when we wish to CSE around a block that is
6775 conditionally executed. */
6776
6777 static void
6778 invalidate_skipped_block (start)
6779 rtx start;
6780 {
6781 rtx insn;
6782 int i;
6783 static struct write_data init = {0, 0, 0, 0};
6784 static struct write_data everything = {0, 1, 1, 1};
6785
6786 for (insn = start; insn && GET_CODE (insn) != CODE_LABEL;
6787 insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
6788 {
6789 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) != 'i')
6790 continue;
6791
6792 skipped_writes_memory = init;
6793
6794 if (GET_CODE (insn) == CALL_INSN)
6795 {
6796 invalidate_for_call ();
6797 skipped_writes_memory = everything;
6798 }
6799
6800 note_stores (PATTERN (insn), invalidate_skipped_set);
6801 invalidate_from_clobbers (&skipped_writes_memory, PATTERN (insn));
6802 }
6803 }
6804 \f
6805 /* Used for communication between the following two routines; contains a
6806 value to be checked for modification. */
6807
6808 static rtx cse_check_loop_start_value;
6809
6810 /* If modifying X will modify the value in CSE_CHECK_LOOP_START_VALUE,
6811 indicate that fact by setting CSE_CHECK_LOOP_START_VALUE to 0. */
6812
6813 static void
6814 cse_check_loop_start (x, set)
6815 rtx x;
6816 rtx set;
6817 {
6818 if (cse_check_loop_start_value == 0
6819 || GET_CODE (x) == CC0 || GET_CODE (x) == PC)
6820 return;
6821
6822 if ((GET_CODE (x) == MEM && GET_CODE (cse_check_loop_start_value) == MEM)
6823 || reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x, cse_check_loop_start_value))
6824 cse_check_loop_start_value = 0;
6825 }
6826
6827 /* X is a SET or CLOBBER contained in INSN that was found near the start of
6828 a loop that starts with the label at LOOP_START.
6829
6830 If X is a SET, we see if its SET_SRC is currently in our hash table.
6831 If so, we see if it has a value equal to some register used only in the
6832 loop exit code (as marked by jump.c).
6833
6834 If those two conditions are true, we search backwards from the start of
6835 the loop to see if that same value was loaded into a register that still
6836 retains its value at the start of the loop.
6837
6838 If so, we insert an insn after the load to copy the destination of that
6839 load into the equivalent register and (try to) replace our SET_SRC with that
6840 register.
6841
6842 In any event, we invalidate whatever this SET or CLOBBER modifies. */
6843
6844 static void
6845 cse_set_around_loop (x, insn, loop_start)
6846 rtx x;
6847 rtx insn;
6848 rtx loop_start;
6849 {
6850 rtx p;
6851 struct table_elt *src_elt;
6852 static struct write_data init = {0, 0, 0, 0};
6853 struct write_data writes_memory;
6854
6855 writes_memory = init;
6856
6857 /* If this is a SET, see if we can replace SET_SRC, but ignore SETs that
6858 are setting PC or CC0 or whose SET_SRC is already a register. */
6859 if (GET_CODE (x) == SET
6860 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != PC && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != CC0
6861 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) != REG)
6862 {
6863 src_elt = lookup (SET_SRC (x),
6864 HASH (SET_SRC (x), GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x))),
6865 GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x)));
6866
6867 if (src_elt)
6868 for (src_elt = src_elt->first_same_value; src_elt;
6869 src_elt = src_elt->next_same_value)
6870 if (GET_CODE (src_elt->exp) == REG && REG_LOOP_TEST_P (src_elt->exp)
6871 && COST (src_elt->exp) < COST (SET_SRC (x)))
6872 {
6873 rtx p, set;
6874
6875 /* Look for an insn in front of LOOP_START that sets
6876 something in the desired mode to SET_SRC (x) before we hit
6877 a label or CALL_INSN. */
6878
6879 for (p = prev_nonnote_insn (loop_start);
6880 p && GET_CODE (p) != CALL_INSN
6881 && GET_CODE (p) != CODE_LABEL;
6882 p = prev_nonnote_insn (p))
6883 if ((set = single_set (p)) != 0
6884 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set)) == REG
6885 && GET_MODE (SET_DEST (set)) == src_elt->mode
6886 && rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (set), SET_SRC (x)))
6887 {
6888 /* We now have to ensure that nothing between P
6889 and LOOP_START modified anything referenced in
6890 SET_SRC (x). We know that nothing within the loop
6891 can modify it, or we would have invalidated it in
6892 the hash table. */
6893 rtx q;
6894
6895 cse_check_loop_start_value = SET_SRC (x);
6896 for (q = p; q != loop_start; q = NEXT_INSN (q))
6897 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (q)) == 'i')
6898 note_stores (PATTERN (q), cse_check_loop_start);
6899
6900 /* If nothing was changed and we can replace our
6901 SET_SRC, add an insn after P to copy its destination
6902 to what we will be replacing SET_SRC with. */
6903 if (cse_check_loop_start_value
6904 && validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (x),
6905 src_elt->exp, 0))
6906 emit_insn_after (gen_move_insn (src_elt->exp,
6907 SET_DEST (set)),
6908 p);
6909 break;
6910 }
6911 }
6912 }
6913
6914 /* Now invalidate anything modified by X. */
6915 note_mem_written (SET_DEST (x), &writes_memory);
6916
6917 if (writes_memory.var)
6918 invalidate_memory (&writes_memory);
6919
6920 /* See comment on similar code in cse_insn for explanation of these tests. */
6921 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == REG || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == SUBREG
6922 || (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == MEM && ! writes_memory.all
6923 && ! cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (SET_DEST (x))))
6924 invalidate (SET_DEST (x));
6925 }
6926 \f
6927 /* Find the end of INSN's basic block and return its range,
6928 the total number of SETs in all the insns of the block, the last insn of the
6929 block, and the branch path.
6930
6931 The branch path indicates which branches should be followed. If a non-zero
6932 path size is specified, the block should be rescanned and a different set
6933 of branches will be taken. The branch path is only used if
6934 FLAG_CSE_FOLLOW_JUMPS or FLAG_CSE_SKIP_BLOCKS is non-zero.
6935
6936 DATA is a pointer to a struct cse_basic_block_data, defined below, that is
6937 used to describe the block. It is filled in with the information about
6938 the current block. The incoming structure's branch path, if any, is used
6939 to construct the output branch path. */
6940
6941 /* Define maximum length of a branch path. */
6942
6943 #define PATHLENGTH 20
6944
6945 struct cse_basic_block_data {
6946 /* Lowest CUID value of insns in block. */
6947 int low_cuid;
6948 /* Highest CUID value of insns in block. */
6949 int high_cuid;
6950 /* Total number of SETs in block. */
6951 int nsets;
6952 /* Last insn in the block. */
6953 rtx last;
6954 /* Size of current branch path, if any. */
6955 int path_size;
6956 /* Current branch path, indicating which branches will be taken. */
6957 struct branch_path {
6958 /* The branch insn. */
6959 rtx branch;
6960 /* Whether it should be taken or not. AROUND is the same as taken
6961 except that it is used when the destination label is not preceded
6962 by a BARRIER. */
6963 enum taken {TAKEN, NOT_TAKEN, AROUND} status;
6964 } path[PATHLENGTH];
6965 };
6966
6967 void
6968 cse_end_of_basic_block (insn, data, follow_jumps, after_loop, skip_blocks)
6969 rtx insn;
6970 struct cse_basic_block_data *data;
6971 int follow_jumps;
6972 int after_loop;
6973 int skip_blocks;
6974 {
6975 rtx p = insn, q;
6976 int nsets = 0;
6977 int low_cuid = INSN_CUID (insn), high_cuid = INSN_CUID (insn);
6978 rtx next = GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) == 'i' ? insn : next_real_insn (insn);
6979 int path_size = data->path_size;
6980 int path_entry = 0;
6981 int i;
6982
6983 /* Update the previous branch path, if any. If the last branch was
6984 previously TAKEN, mark it NOT_TAKEN. If it was previously NOT_TAKEN,
6985 shorten the path by one and look at the previous branch. We know that
6986 at least one branch must have been taken if PATH_SIZE is non-zero. */
6987 while (path_size > 0)
6988 {
6989 if (data->path[path_size - 1].status != NOT_TAKEN)
6990 {
6991 data->path[path_size - 1].status = NOT_TAKEN;
6992 break;
6993 }
6994 else
6995 path_size--;
6996 }
6997
6998 /* Scan to end of this basic block. */
6999 while (p && GET_CODE (p) != CODE_LABEL)
7000 {
7001 /* Don't cse out the end of a loop. This makes a difference
7002 only for the unusual loops that always execute at least once;
7003 all other loops have labels there so we will stop in any case.
7004 Cse'ing out the end of the loop is dangerous because it
7005 might cause an invariant expression inside the loop
7006 to be reused after the end of the loop. This would make it
7007 hard to move the expression out of the loop in loop.c,
7008 especially if it is one of several equivalent expressions
7009 and loop.c would like to eliminate it.
7010
7011 If we are running after loop.c has finished, we can ignore
7012 the NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END. */
7013
7014 if (! after_loop && GET_CODE (p) == NOTE
7015 && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (p) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END)
7016 break;
7017
7018 /* Don't cse over a call to setjmp; on some machines (eg vax)
7019 the regs restored by the longjmp come from
7020 a later time than the setjmp. */
7021 if (GET_CODE (p) == NOTE
7022 && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (p) == NOTE_INSN_SETJMP)
7023 break;
7024
7025 /* A PARALLEL can have lots of SETs in it,
7026 especially if it is really an ASM_OPERANDS. */
7027 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (p)) == 'i'
7028 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (p)) == PARALLEL)
7029 nsets += XVECLEN (PATTERN (p), 0);
7030 else if (GET_CODE (p) != NOTE)
7031 nsets += 1;
7032
7033 if (INSN_CUID (p) > high_cuid)
7034 high_cuid = INSN_CUID (p);
7035 if (INSN_CUID (p) < low_cuid)
7036 low_cuid = INSN_CUID(p);
7037
7038 /* See if this insn is in our branch path. If it is and we are to
7039 take it, do so. */
7040 if (path_entry < path_size && data->path[path_entry].branch == p)
7041 {
7042 if (data->path[path_entry].status != NOT_TAKEN)
7043 p = JUMP_LABEL (p);
7044
7045 /* Point to next entry in path, if any. */
7046 path_entry++;
7047 }
7048
7049 /* If this is a conditional jump, we can follow it if -fcse-follow-jumps
7050 was specified, we haven't reached our maximum path length, there are
7051 insns following the target of the jump, this is the only use of the
7052 jump label, and the target label is preceded by a BARRIER.
7053
7054 Alternatively, we can follow the jump if it branches around a
7055 block of code and there are no other branches into the block.
7056 In this case invalidate_skipped_block will be called to invalidate any
7057 registers set in the block when following the jump. */
7058
7059 else if ((follow_jumps || skip_blocks) && path_size < PATHLENGTH - 1
7060 && GET_CODE (p) == JUMP_INSN
7061 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (p)) == SET
7062 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (PATTERN (p))) == IF_THEN_ELSE
7063 && LABEL_NUSES (JUMP_LABEL (p)) == 1
7064 && NEXT_INSN (JUMP_LABEL (p)) != 0)
7065 {
7066 for (q = PREV_INSN (JUMP_LABEL (p)); q; q = PREV_INSN (q))
7067 if ((GET_CODE (q) != NOTE
7068 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (q) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END
7069 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (q) == NOTE_INSN_SETJMP)
7070 && (GET_CODE (q) != CODE_LABEL || LABEL_NUSES (q) != 0))
7071 break;
7072
7073 /* If we ran into a BARRIER, this code is an extension of the
7074 basic block when the branch is taken. */
7075 if (follow_jumps && q != 0 && GET_CODE (q) == BARRIER)
7076 {
7077 /* Don't allow ourself to keep walking around an
7078 always-executed loop. */
7079 if (next_real_insn (q) == next)
7080 {
7081 p = NEXT_INSN (p);
7082 continue;
7083 }
7084
7085 /* Similarly, don't put a branch in our path more than once. */
7086 for (i = 0; i < path_entry; i++)
7087 if (data->path[i].branch == p)
7088 break;
7089
7090 if (i != path_entry)
7091 break;
7092
7093 data->path[path_entry].branch = p;
7094 data->path[path_entry++].status = TAKEN;
7095
7096 /* This branch now ends our path. It was possible that we
7097 didn't see this branch the last time around (when the
7098 insn in front of the target was a JUMP_INSN that was
7099 turned into a no-op). */
7100 path_size = path_entry;
7101
7102 p = JUMP_LABEL (p);
7103 /* Mark block so we won't scan it again later. */
7104 PUT_MODE (NEXT_INSN (p), QImode);
7105 }
7106 /* Detect a branch around a block of code. */
7107 else if (skip_blocks && q != 0 && GET_CODE (q) != CODE_LABEL)
7108 {
7109 register rtx tmp;
7110
7111 if (next_real_insn (q) == next)
7112 {
7113 p = NEXT_INSN (p);
7114 continue;
7115 }
7116
7117 for (i = 0; i < path_entry; i++)
7118 if (data->path[i].branch == p)
7119 break;
7120
7121 if (i != path_entry)
7122 break;
7123
7124 /* This is no_labels_between_p (p, q) with an added check for
7125 reaching the end of a function (in case Q precedes P). */
7126 for (tmp = NEXT_INSN (p); tmp && tmp != q; tmp = NEXT_INSN (tmp))
7127 if (GET_CODE (tmp) == CODE_LABEL)
7128 break;
7129
7130 if (tmp == q)
7131 {
7132 data->path[path_entry].branch = p;
7133 data->path[path_entry++].status = AROUND;
7134
7135 path_size = path_entry;
7136
7137 p = JUMP_LABEL (p);
7138 /* Mark block so we won't scan it again later. */
7139 PUT_MODE (NEXT_INSN (p), QImode);
7140 }
7141 }
7142 }
7143 p = NEXT_INSN (p);
7144 }
7145
7146 data->low_cuid = low_cuid;
7147 data->high_cuid = high_cuid;
7148 data->nsets = nsets;
7149 data->last = p;
7150
7151 /* If all jumps in the path are not taken, set our path length to zero
7152 so a rescan won't be done. */
7153 for (i = path_size - 1; i >= 0; i--)
7154 if (data->path[i].status != NOT_TAKEN)
7155 break;
7156
7157 if (i == -1)
7158 data->path_size = 0;
7159 else
7160 data->path_size = path_size;
7161
7162 /* End the current branch path. */
7163 data->path[path_size].branch = 0;
7164 }
7165 \f
7166 static rtx cse_basic_block ();
7167
7168 /* Perform cse on the instructions of a function.
7169 F is the first instruction.
7170 NREGS is one plus the highest pseudo-reg number used in the instruction.
7171
7172 AFTER_LOOP is 1 if this is the cse call done after loop optimization
7173 (only if -frerun-cse-after-loop).
7174
7175 Returns 1 if jump_optimize should be redone due to simplifications
7176 in conditional jump instructions. */
7177
7178 int
7179 cse_main (f, nregs, after_loop, file)
7180 rtx f;
7181 int nregs;
7182 int after_loop;
7183 FILE *file;
7184 {
7185 struct cse_basic_block_data val;
7186 register rtx insn = f;
7187 register int i;
7188
7189 cse_jumps_altered = 0;
7190 constant_pool_entries_cost = 0;
7191 val.path_size = 0;
7192
7193 init_recog ();
7194
7195 max_reg = nregs;
7196
7197 all_minus_one = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7198 consec_ints = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7199
7200 for (i = 0; i < nregs; i++)
7201 {
7202 all_minus_one[i] = -1;
7203 consec_ints[i] = i;
7204 }
7205
7206 reg_next_eqv = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7207 reg_prev_eqv = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7208 reg_qty = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7209 reg_in_table = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7210 reg_tick = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7211
7212 /* Discard all the free elements of the previous function
7213 since they are allocated in the temporarily obstack. */
7214 bzero (table, sizeof table);
7215 free_element_chain = 0;
7216 n_elements_made = 0;
7217
7218 /* Find the largest uid. */
7219
7220 i = get_max_uid ();
7221 uid_cuid = (short *) alloca ((i + 1) * sizeof (short));
7222 bzero (uid_cuid, (i + 1) * sizeof (short));
7223
7224 /* Compute the mapping from uids to cuids.
7225 CUIDs are numbers assigned to insns, like uids,
7226 except that cuids increase monotonically through the code.
7227 Don't assign cuids to line-number NOTEs, so that the distance in cuids
7228 between two insns is not affected by -g. */
7229
7230 for (insn = f, i = 0; insn; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
7231 {
7232 if (GET_CODE (insn) != NOTE
7233 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) < 0)
7234 INSN_CUID (insn) = ++i;
7235 else
7236 /* Give a line number note the same cuid as preceding insn. */
7237 INSN_CUID (insn) = i;
7238 }
7239
7240 /* Initialize which registers are clobbered by calls. */
7241
7242 CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (regs_invalidated_by_call);
7243
7244 for (i = 0; i < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER; i++)
7245 if ((call_used_regs[i]
7246 /* Used to check !fixed_regs[i] here, but that isn't safe;
7247 fixed regs are still call-clobbered, and sched can get
7248 confused if they can "live across calls".
7249
7250 The frame pointer is always preserved across calls. The arg
7251 pointer is if it is fixed. The stack pointer usually is, unless
7252 RETURN_POPS_ARGS, in which case an explicit CLOBBER
7253 will be present. If we are generating PIC code, the PIC offset
7254 table register is preserved across calls. */
7255
7256 && i != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
7257 && i != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
7258 #if ARG_POINTER_REGNUM != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
7259 && ! (i == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM && fixed_regs[i])
7260 #endif
7261 #ifdef PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
7262 && ! (i == PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM && flag_pic)
7263 #endif
7264 )
7265 || global_regs[i])
7266 SET_HARD_REG_BIT (regs_invalidated_by_call, i);
7267
7268 /* Loop over basic blocks.
7269 Compute the maximum number of qty's needed for each basic block
7270 (which is 2 for each SET). */
7271 insn = f;
7272 while (insn)
7273 {
7274 cse_end_of_basic_block (insn, &val, flag_cse_follow_jumps, after_loop,
7275 flag_cse_skip_blocks);
7276
7277 /* If this basic block was already processed or has no sets, skip it. */
7278 if (val.nsets == 0 || GET_MODE (insn) == QImode)
7279 {
7280 PUT_MODE (insn, VOIDmode);
7281 insn = (val.last ? NEXT_INSN (val.last) : 0);
7282 val.path_size = 0;
7283 continue;
7284 }
7285
7286 cse_basic_block_start = val.low_cuid;
7287 cse_basic_block_end = val.high_cuid;
7288 max_qty = val.nsets * 2;
7289
7290 if (file)
7291 fprintf (file, ";; Processing block from %d to %d, %d sets.\n",
7292 INSN_UID (insn), val.last ? INSN_UID (val.last) : 0,
7293 val.nsets);
7294
7295 /* Make MAX_QTY bigger to give us room to optimize
7296 past the end of this basic block, if that should prove useful. */
7297 if (max_qty < 500)
7298 max_qty = 500;
7299
7300 max_qty += max_reg;
7301
7302 /* If this basic block is being extended by following certain jumps,
7303 (see `cse_end_of_basic_block'), we reprocess the code from the start.
7304 Otherwise, we start after this basic block. */
7305 if (val.path_size > 0)
7306 cse_basic_block (insn, val.last, val.path, 0);
7307 else
7308 {
7309 int old_cse_jumps_altered = cse_jumps_altered;
7310 rtx temp;
7311
7312 /* When cse changes a conditional jump to an unconditional
7313 jump, we want to reprocess the block, since it will give
7314 us a new branch path to investigate. */
7315 cse_jumps_altered = 0;
7316 temp = cse_basic_block (insn, val.last, val.path, ! after_loop);
7317 if (cse_jumps_altered == 0
7318 || (flag_cse_follow_jumps == 0 && flag_cse_skip_blocks == 0))
7319 insn = temp;
7320
7321 cse_jumps_altered |= old_cse_jumps_altered;
7322 }
7323
7324 #ifdef USE_C_ALLOCA
7325 alloca (0);
7326 #endif
7327 }
7328
7329 /* Tell refers_to_mem_p that qty_const info is not available. */
7330 qty_const = 0;
7331
7332 if (max_elements_made < n_elements_made)
7333 max_elements_made = n_elements_made;
7334
7335 return cse_jumps_altered;
7336 }
7337
7338 /* Process a single basic block. FROM and TO and the limits of the basic
7339 block. NEXT_BRANCH points to the branch path when following jumps or
7340 a null path when not following jumps.
7341
7342 AROUND_LOOP is non-zero if we are to try to cse around to the start of a
7343 loop. This is true when we are being called for the last time on a
7344 block and this CSE pass is before loop.c. */
7345
7346 static rtx
7347 cse_basic_block (from, to, next_branch, around_loop)
7348 register rtx from, to;
7349 struct branch_path *next_branch;
7350 int around_loop;
7351 {
7352 register rtx insn;
7353 int to_usage = 0;
7354 int in_libcall_block = 0;
7355
7356 /* Each of these arrays is undefined before max_reg, so only allocate
7357 the space actually needed and adjust the start below. */
7358
7359 qty_first_reg = (int *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (int));
7360 qty_last_reg = (int *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (int));
7361 qty_mode= (enum machine_mode *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (enum machine_mode));
7362 qty_const = (rtx *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (rtx));
7363 qty_const_insn = (rtx *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (rtx));
7364 qty_comparison_code
7365 = (enum rtx_code *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (enum rtx_code));
7366 qty_comparison_qty = (int *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (int));
7367 qty_comparison_const = (rtx *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (rtx));
7368
7369 qty_first_reg -= max_reg;
7370 qty_last_reg -= max_reg;
7371 qty_mode -= max_reg;
7372 qty_const -= max_reg;
7373 qty_const_insn -= max_reg;
7374 qty_comparison_code -= max_reg;
7375 qty_comparison_qty -= max_reg;
7376 qty_comparison_const -= max_reg;
7377
7378 new_basic_block ();
7379
7380 /* TO might be a label. If so, protect it from being deleted. */
7381 if (to != 0 && GET_CODE (to) == CODE_LABEL)
7382 ++LABEL_NUSES (to);
7383
7384 for (insn = from; insn != to; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
7385 {
7386 register enum rtx_code code;
7387
7388 /* See if this is a branch that is part of the path. If so, and it is
7389 to be taken, do so. */
7390 if (next_branch->branch == insn)
7391 {
7392 enum taken status = next_branch++->status;
7393 if (status != NOT_TAKEN)
7394 {
7395 if (status == TAKEN)
7396 record_jump_equiv (insn, 1);
7397 else
7398 invalidate_skipped_block (NEXT_INSN (insn));
7399
7400 /* Set the last insn as the jump insn; it doesn't affect cc0.
7401 Then follow this branch. */
7402 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
7403 prev_insn_cc0 = 0;
7404 #endif
7405 prev_insn = insn;
7406 insn = JUMP_LABEL (insn);
7407 continue;
7408 }
7409 }
7410
7411 code = GET_CODE (insn);
7412 if (GET_MODE (insn) == QImode)
7413 PUT_MODE (insn, VOIDmode);
7414
7415 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'i')
7416 {
7417 /* Process notes first so we have all notes in canonical forms when
7418 looking for duplicate operations. */
7419
7420 if (REG_NOTES (insn))
7421 REG_NOTES (insn) = cse_process_notes (REG_NOTES (insn), 0);
7422
7423 /* Track when we are inside in LIBCALL block. Inside such a block,
7424 we do not want to record destinations. The last insn of a
7425 LIBCALL block is not considered to be part of the block, since
7426 its destination is the result of the block and hence should be
7427 recorded. */
7428
7429 if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_LIBCALL, 0))
7430 in_libcall_block = 1;
7431 else if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_RETVAL, 0))
7432 in_libcall_block = 0;
7433
7434 cse_insn (insn, in_libcall_block);
7435 }
7436
7437 /* If INSN is now an unconditional jump, skip to the end of our
7438 basic block by pretending that we just did the last insn in the
7439 basic block. If we are jumping to the end of our block, show
7440 that we can have one usage of TO. */
7441
7442 if (simplejump_p (insn))
7443 {
7444 if (to == 0)
7445 return 0;
7446
7447 if (JUMP_LABEL (insn) == to)
7448 to_usage = 1;
7449
7450 /* Maybe TO was deleted because the jump is unconditional.
7451 If so, there is nothing left in this basic block. */
7452 /* ??? Perhaps it would be smarter to set TO
7453 to whatever follows this insn,
7454 and pretend the basic block had always ended here. */
7455 if (INSN_DELETED_P (to))
7456 break;
7457
7458 insn = PREV_INSN (to);
7459 }
7460
7461 /* See if it is ok to keep on going past the label
7462 which used to end our basic block. Remember that we incremented
7463 the count of that label, so we decrement it here. If we made
7464 a jump unconditional, TO_USAGE will be one; in that case, we don't
7465 want to count the use in that jump. */
7466
7467 if (to != 0 && NEXT_INSN (insn) == to
7468 && GET_CODE (to) == CODE_LABEL && --LABEL_NUSES (to) == to_usage)
7469 {
7470 struct cse_basic_block_data val;
7471
7472 insn = NEXT_INSN (to);
7473
7474 if (LABEL_NUSES (to) == 0)
7475 delete_insn (to);
7476
7477 /* Find the end of the following block. Note that we won't be
7478 following branches in this case. If TO was the last insn
7479 in the function, we are done. Similarly, if we deleted the
7480 insn after TO, it must have been because it was preceded by
7481 a BARRIER. In that case, we are done with this block because it
7482 has no continuation. */
7483
7484 if (insn == 0 || INSN_DELETED_P (insn))
7485 return 0;
7486
7487 to_usage = 0;
7488 val.path_size = 0;
7489 cse_end_of_basic_block (insn, &val, 0, 0, 0);
7490
7491 /* If the tables we allocated have enough space left
7492 to handle all the SETs in the next basic block,
7493 continue through it. Otherwise, return,
7494 and that block will be scanned individually. */
7495 if (val.nsets * 2 + next_qty > max_qty)
7496 break;
7497
7498 cse_basic_block_start = val.low_cuid;
7499 cse_basic_block_end = val.high_cuid;
7500 to = val.last;
7501
7502 /* Prevent TO from being deleted if it is a label. */
7503 if (to != 0 && GET_CODE (to) == CODE_LABEL)
7504 ++LABEL_NUSES (to);
7505
7506 /* Back up so we process the first insn in the extension. */
7507 insn = PREV_INSN (insn);
7508 }
7509 }
7510
7511 if (next_qty > max_qty)
7512 abort ();
7513
7514 /* If we are running before loop.c, we stopped on a NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END, and
7515 the previous insn is the only insn that branches to the head of a loop,
7516 we can cse into the loop. Don't do this if we changed the jump
7517 structure of a loop unless we aren't going to be following jumps. */
7518
7519 if ((cse_jumps_altered == 0
7520 || (flag_cse_follow_jumps == 0 && flag_cse_skip_blocks == 0))
7521 && around_loop && to != 0
7522 && GET_CODE (to) == NOTE && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (to) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END
7523 && GET_CODE (PREV_INSN (to)) == JUMP_INSN
7524 && JUMP_LABEL (PREV_INSN (to)) != 0
7525 && LABEL_NUSES (JUMP_LABEL (PREV_INSN (to))) == 1)
7526 cse_around_loop (JUMP_LABEL (PREV_INSN (to)));
7527
7528 return to ? NEXT_INSN (to) : 0;
7529 }
7530 \f
7531 /* Count the number of times registers are used (not set) in X.
7532 COUNTS is an array in which we accumulate the count, INCR is how much
7533 we count each register usage. */
7534
7535 static void
7536 count_reg_usage (x, counts, incr)
7537 rtx x;
7538 int *counts;
7539 int incr;
7540 {
7541 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
7542 char *fmt;
7543 int i, j;
7544
7545 switch (code)
7546 {
7547 case REG:
7548 counts[REGNO (x)] += incr;
7549 return;
7550
7551 case PC:
7552 case CC0:
7553 case CONST:
7554 case CONST_INT:
7555 case CONST_DOUBLE:
7556 case SYMBOL_REF:
7557 case LABEL_REF:
7558 case CLOBBER:
7559 return;
7560
7561 case SET:
7562 /* Unless we are setting a REG, count everything in SET_DEST. */
7563 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != REG)
7564 count_reg_usage (SET_DEST (x), counts, incr);
7565 count_reg_usage (SET_SRC (x), counts, incr);
7566 return;
7567
7568 case INSN:
7569 case JUMP_INSN:
7570 case CALL_INSN:
7571 count_reg_usage (PATTERN (x), counts, incr);
7572
7573 /* Things used in a REG_EQUAL note aren't dead since loop may try to
7574 use them. */
7575
7576 if (REG_NOTES (x))
7577 count_reg_usage (REG_NOTES (x), counts, incr);
7578 return;
7579
7580 case EXPR_LIST:
7581 case INSN_LIST:
7582 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (x) == REG_EQUAL)
7583 count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, 0), counts, incr);
7584 if (XEXP (x, 1))
7585 count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, 1), counts, incr);
7586 return;
7587 }
7588
7589 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
7590 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
7591 {
7592 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
7593 count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, i), counts, incr);
7594 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
7595 for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
7596 count_reg_usage (XVECEXP (x, i, j), counts, incr);
7597 }
7598 }
7599 \f
7600 /* Scan all the insns and delete any that are dead; i.e., they store a register
7601 that is never used or they copy a register to itself.
7602
7603 This is used to remove insns made obviously dead by cse. It improves the
7604 heuristics in loop since it won't try to move dead invariants out of loops
7605 or make givs for dead quantities. The remaining passes of the compilation
7606 are also sped up. */
7607
7608 void
7609 delete_dead_from_cse (insns, nreg)
7610 rtx insns;
7611 int nreg;
7612 {
7613 int *counts = (int *) alloca (nreg * sizeof (int));
7614 rtx insn;
7615 rtx tem;
7616 int i;
7617 int in_libcall = 0;
7618
7619 /* First count the number of times each register is used. */
7620 bzero (counts, sizeof (int) * nreg);
7621 for (insn = next_real_insn (insns); insn; insn = next_real_insn (insn))
7622 count_reg_usage (insn, counts, 1);
7623
7624 /* Go from the last insn to the first and delete insns that only set unused
7625 registers or copy a register to itself. As we delete an insn, remove
7626 usage counts for registers it uses. */
7627 for (insn = prev_real_insn (get_last_insn ());
7628 insn; insn = prev_real_insn (insn))
7629 {
7630 int live_insn = 0;
7631
7632 /* Don't delete any insns that are part of a libcall block.
7633 Flow or loop might get confused if we did that. */
7634 if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_LIBCALL, 0))
7635 in_libcall = 1;
7636
7637 if (in_libcall)
7638 live_insn = 1;
7639 else if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET)
7640 {
7641 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) == REG
7642 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn)) == SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)))
7643 ;
7644
7645 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
7646 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) == CC0
7647 && ! side_effects_p (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)))
7648 && ((tem = next_nonnote_insn (insn)) == 0
7649 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (tem)) != 'i'
7650 || ! reg_referenced_p (cc0_rtx, PATTERN (tem))))
7651 ;
7652 #endif
7653 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) != REG
7654 || REGNO (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
7655 || counts[REGNO (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn)))] != 0
7656 || side_effects_p (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn))))
7657 live_insn = 1;
7658 }
7659 else if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL)
7660 for (i = XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
7661 {
7662 rtx elt = XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i);
7663
7664 if (GET_CODE (elt) == SET)
7665 {
7666 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (elt)) == REG
7667 && SET_DEST (elt) == SET_SRC (elt))
7668 ;
7669
7670 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
7671 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (elt)) == CC0
7672 && ! side_effects_p (SET_SRC (elt))
7673 && ((tem = next_nonnote_insn (insn)) == 0
7674 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (tem)) != 'i'
7675 || ! reg_referenced_p (cc0_rtx, PATTERN (tem))))
7676 ;
7677 #endif
7678 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (elt)) != REG
7679 || REGNO (SET_DEST (elt)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
7680 || counts[REGNO (SET_DEST (elt))] != 0
7681 || side_effects_p (SET_SRC (elt)))
7682 live_insn = 1;
7683 }
7684 else if (GET_CODE (elt) != CLOBBER && GET_CODE (elt) != USE)
7685 live_insn = 1;
7686 }
7687 else
7688 live_insn = 1;
7689
7690 /* If this is a dead insn, delete it and show registers in it aren't
7691 being used. */
7692
7693 if (! live_insn)
7694 {
7695 count_reg_usage (insn, counts, -1);
7696 PUT_CODE (insn, NOTE);
7697 NOTE_SOURCE_FILE (insn) = 0;
7698 NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) = NOTE_INSN_DELETED;
7699 }
7700
7701 if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_RETVAL, 0))
7702 in_libcall = 0;
7703 }
7704 }
This page took 0.40487 seconds and 6 git commands to generate.